blob: 568b278dd47cb19045cd82091ee1e0fd49cef210 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001//===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===//
2//
3// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00007//
8//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9//
10// This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for
Gordon Henriksen829046b2008-05-08 17:46:35 +000011// SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's
12// basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000013//
14//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
15
Quentin Colombeta3490842014-02-22 00:07:45 +000016#include "llvm/CodeGen/Passes.h"
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +000017#include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetPassConfig.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h"
23#include "llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h"
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h"
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileSummaryInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth62d42152015-01-15 02:16:27 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h"
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +000032#include "llvm/CodeGen/Analysis.h"
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000033#include "llvm/CodeGen/Passes.h"
Chandler Carruth219b89b2014-03-04 11:01:28 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Chandler Carruth5ad5f152014-01-13 09:26:24 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Chandler Carruth03eb0de2014-03-04 10:40:04 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
42#include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +000045#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000046#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h"
Chandler Carruth4220e9c2014-03-04 11:17:44 +000048#include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
Chandler Carrutha4ea2692014-03-04 11:26:31 +000049#include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h"
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000050#include "llvm/Pass.h"
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +000051#include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
Evan Cheng8b637b12010-08-17 01:34:49 +000052#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +000053#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000054#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000055#include "llvm/Target/TargetLowering.h"
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +000056#include "llvm/Target/TargetSubtargetInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000057#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
58#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BuildLibCalls.h"
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +000059#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000060#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Cloning.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000061#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +000062#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000063#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000064
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000065using namespace llvm;
Chris Lattnerd616ef52008-11-25 04:42:10 +000066using namespace llvm::PatternMatch;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000067
Chandler Carruth1b9dde02014-04-22 02:02:50 +000068#define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare"
69
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000070STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000071STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated");
72STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts");
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000073STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of "
74 "sunken Cmps");
75STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses "
76 "of sunken Casts");
77STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address "
78 "computations were sunk");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000079STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads");
80STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized");
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +000081STATISTIC(NumAndsAdded,
82 "Number of and mask instructions added to form ext loads");
83STATISTIC(NumAndUses, "Number of uses of and mask instructions optimized");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000084STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated");
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +000085STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved");
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +000086STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000087STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed");
Jakob Stoklund Oleseneb12f492010-09-30 20:51:52 +000088
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000089STATISTIC(NumMemCmpCalls, "Number of memcmp calls");
90STATISTIC(NumMemCmpNotConstant, "Number of memcmp calls without constant size");
91STATISTIC(NumMemCmpGreaterThanMax,
92 "Number of memcmp calls with size greater than max size");
93STATISTIC(NumMemCmpInlined, "Number of inlined memcmp calls");
94
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +000095static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts(
96 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
97 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
98
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000099static cl::opt<bool>
100 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
101 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
102
Benjamin Kramer3d38c172012-05-06 14:25:16 +0000103static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch(
104 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
105 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion."));
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000106
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +0000107static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs(
Eli Friedman5fba1e52017-04-06 22:42:18 +0000108 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +0000109 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs."));
110
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000111static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking(
112 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
113 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches."));
114
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000115static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract(
116 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
117 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
118
119static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract(
120 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
121 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
122
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000123static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion(
124 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
125 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in "
126 "CodeGenPrepare"));
127
128static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion(
129 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
130 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) "
131 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare"));
132
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000133static cl::opt<bool> DisablePreheaderProtect(
134 "disable-preheader-prot", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
135 cl::desc("Disable protection against removing loop preheaders"));
136
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000137static cl::opt<bool> ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix(
138 "profile-guided-section-prefix", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
139 cl::desc("Use profile info to add section prefix for hot/cold functions"));
140
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000141static cl::opt<unsigned> FreqRatioToSkipMerge(
142 "cgp-freq-ratio-to-skip-merge", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
143 cl::desc("Skip merging empty blocks if (frequency of empty block) / "
144 "(frequency of destination block) is greater than this ratio"));
145
Wei Mia2f0b592016-12-22 19:44:45 +0000146static cl::opt<bool> ForceSplitStore(
147 "force-split-store", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
148 cl::desc("Force store splitting no matter what the target query says."));
149
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000150static cl::opt<bool>
151EnableTypePromotionMerge("cgp-type-promotion-merge", cl::Hidden,
152 cl::desc("Enable merging of redundant sexts when one is dominating"
153 " the other."), cl::init(true));
154
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +0000155static cl::opt<unsigned> MemCmpNumLoadsPerBlock(
156 "memcmp-num-loads-per-block", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1),
157 cl::desc("The number of loads per basic block for inline expansion of "
158 "memcmp that is only being compared against zero."));
159
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000160namespace {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000161typedef SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> SetOfInstrs;
Benjamin Kramer4cd5faa2015-07-31 17:00:39 +0000162typedef PointerIntPair<Type *, 1, bool> TypeIsSExt;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +0000163typedef DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt> InstrToOrigTy;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000164typedef SmallVector<Instruction *, 16> SExts;
165typedef DenseMap<Value *, SExts> ValueToSExts;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000166class TypePromotionTransaction;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000167
Chris Lattner2dd09db2009-09-02 06:11:42 +0000168 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass {
Bill Wendling7a639ea2013-06-19 21:07:11 +0000169 const TargetMachine *TM;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +0000170 const TargetSubtargetInfo *SubtargetInfo;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000171 const TargetLowering *TLI;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +0000172 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI;
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000173 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI;
Chad Rosierc24b86f2011-12-01 03:08:23 +0000174 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo;
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000175 const LoopInfo *LI;
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000176 std::unique_ptr<BlockFrequencyInfo> BFI;
177 std::unique_ptr<BranchProbabilityInfo> BPI;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000178
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000179 /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction
180 /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it.
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +0000181 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator;
Evan Cheng3b3de7c2008-12-19 18:03:11 +0000182
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000183 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block.
184 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with
185 /// multiple load/stores of the same address.
Nick Lewycky5fb19632013-05-08 09:00:10 +0000186 ValueMap<Value*, Value*> SunkAddrs;
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000187
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +0000188 /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function.
189 SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000190 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their
191 /// promotion for the current function.
192 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts;
193
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000194 /// Keep track of instructions removed during promotion.
195 SetOfInstrs RemovedInsts;
196
197 /// Keep track of sext chains based on their initial value.
198 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *> SeenChainsForSExt;
199
200 /// Keep track of SExt promoted.
201 ValueToSExts ValToSExtendedUses;
202
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000203 /// True if CFG is modified in any way.
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000204 bool ModifiedDT;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000205
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000206 /// True if optimizing for size.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000207 bool OptSize;
208
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000209 /// DataLayout for the Function being processed.
210 const DataLayout *DL;
211
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000212 public:
Nick Lewyckye7da2d62007-05-06 13:37:16 +0000213 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000214 CodeGenPrepare()
215 : FunctionPass(ID), TM(nullptr), TLI(nullptr), TTI(nullptr),
216 DL(nullptr) {
217 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
218 }
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000219 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000220
Mehdi Amini117296c2016-10-01 02:56:57 +0000221 StringRef getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; }
Evan Cheng99cafb12012-12-21 01:48:14 +0000222
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000223 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override {
George Burgess IVd4febd12016-03-22 21:25:08 +0000224 // FIXME: When we can selectively preserve passes, preserve the domtree.
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000225 AU.addRequired<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000226 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruth705b1852015-01-31 03:43:40 +0000227 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>();
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000228 AU.addRequired<LoopInfoWrapperPass>();
Andreas Neustifterf8cb7582009-09-16 09:26:52 +0000229 }
230
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000231 private:
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000232 bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F);
233 bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F);
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000234 BasicBlock *findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000235 bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const;
236 void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000237 bool isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DestBB,
238 bool isPreheader);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000239 bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool& ModifiedDT);
240 bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool& ModifiedDT);
241 bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *I, Value *Addr,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +0000242 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000243 bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS);
244 bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool& ModifiedDT);
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000245 bool optimizeExt(Instruction *&I);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000246 bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +0000247 bool optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *I);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000248 bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI);
249 bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SI);
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +0000250 bool optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *CI);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000251 bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst);
252 bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB);
253 bool placeDbgValues(Function &F);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +0000254 bool canFormExtLd(const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts,
255 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted);
256 bool tryToPromoteExts(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
257 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
258 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts,
259 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0);
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000260 bool mergeSExts(Function &F);
261 bool performAddressTypePromotion(
262 Instruction *&Inst,
263 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
264 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
265 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts);
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000266 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000267 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I);
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000268 bool splitIndirectCriticalEdges(Function &F);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000269 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000270}
Devang Patel09f162c2007-05-01 21:15:47 +0000271
Devang Patel8c78a0b2007-05-03 01:11:54 +0000272char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0;
Matthias Braun1527baa2017-05-25 21:26:32 +0000273INITIALIZE_PASS_BEGIN(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE,
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000274 "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000275INITIALIZE_PASS_DEPENDENCY(ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass)
Matthias Braun1527baa2017-05-25 21:26:32 +0000276INITIALIZE_PASS_END(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE,
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000277 "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000278
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000279FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass() { return new CodeGenPrepare(); }
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000280
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000281bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) {
Andrew Kayloraa641a52016-04-22 22:06:11 +0000282 if (skipFunction(F))
Paul Robinson7c99ec52014-03-31 17:43:35 +0000283 return false;
284
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000285 DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout();
286
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000287 bool EverMadeChange = false;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000288 // Clear per function information.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +0000289 InsertedInsts.clear();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000290 PromotedInsts.clear();
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000291 BFI.reset();
292 BPI.reset();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000293
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000294 ModifiedDT = false;
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000295 if (auto *TPC = getAnalysisIfAvailable<TargetPassConfig>()) {
296 TM = &TPC->getTM<TargetMachine>();
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +0000297 SubtargetInfo = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F);
298 TLI = SubtargetInfo->getTargetLowering();
299 TRI = SubtargetInfo->getRegisterInfo();
300 }
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000301 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI();
Chandler Carruthfdb9c572015-02-01 12:01:35 +0000302 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F);
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000303 LI = &getAnalysis<LoopInfoWrapperPass>().getLoopInfo();
Sanjay Patel82d91dd2015-08-11 19:39:36 +0000304 OptSize = F.optForSize();
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000305
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000306 if (ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix) {
307 ProfileSummaryInfo *PSI =
308 getAnalysis<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>().getPSI();
Dehao Chen775341a2017-03-23 23:14:11 +0000309 if (PSI->isFunctionHotInCallGraph(&F))
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000310 F.setSectionPrefix(".hot");
Dehao Chen775341a2017-03-23 23:14:11 +0000311 else if (PSI->isFunctionColdInCallGraph(&F))
Teresa Johnson720d9b42017-05-09 01:43:24 +0000312 F.setSectionPrefix(".unlikely");
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000313 }
314
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000315 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be
316 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide.
Preston Gurd485296d2013-03-04 18:13:57 +0000317 if (!OptSize && TLI && TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) {
Preston Gurd0d67f512012-10-04 21:33:40 +0000318 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths =
319 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths();
Eric Christopher49a7d6c2016-01-04 23:18:58 +0000320 BasicBlock* BB = &*F.begin();
321 while (BB != nullptr) {
322 // bypassSlowDivision may create new BBs, but we don't want to reapply the
323 // optimization to those blocks.
324 BasicBlock* Next = BB->getNextNode();
325 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(BB, BypassWidths);
326 BB = Next;
327 }
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000328 }
329
330 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000331 // unconditional branch.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000332 EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000333
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000334 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000335 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000336 // find a node corresponding to the value.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000337 EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F);
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000338
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +0000339 if (!DisableBranchOpts)
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000340 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F);
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000341
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000342 // Split some critical edges where one of the sources is an indirect branch,
343 // to help generate sane code for PHIs involving such edges.
344 EverMadeChange |= splitIndirectCriticalEdges(F);
345
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000346 bool MadeChange = true;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000347 while (MadeChange) {
348 MadeChange = false;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000349 SeenChainsForSExt.clear();
350 ValToSExtendedUses.clear();
351 RemovedInsts.clear();
Hans Wennborg02fbc712012-09-19 07:48:16 +0000352 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000353 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000354 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000355 MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000356
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000357 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000358 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration)
359 break;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000360 }
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000361 if (EnableTypePromotionMerge && !ValToSExtendedUses.empty())
362 MadeChange |= mergeSExts(F);
363
364 // Really free removed instructions during promotion.
365 for (Instruction *I : RemovedInsts)
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +0000366 I->deleteValue();
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000367
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000368 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
369 }
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000370
371 SunkAddrs.clear();
372
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000373 if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
374 MadeChange = false;
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000375 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +0000376 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
377 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB));
378 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true);
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000379 if (!MadeChange) continue;
380
381 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
382 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
383 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
384 WorkList.insert(*II);
385 }
386
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000387 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors.
Bill Wendlingab417b62012-12-06 00:30:20 +0000388 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty();
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000389 while (!WorkList.empty()) {
390 BasicBlock *BB = *WorkList.begin();
391 WorkList.erase(BB);
392 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
393
394 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +0000395
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000396 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
397 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
398 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
399 WorkList.insert(*II);
400 }
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000401
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000402 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by
403 // a single edge.
404 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000405 MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000406
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000407 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
408 }
409
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000410 if (!DisableGCOpts) {
411 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints;
412 for (BasicBlock &BB : F)
413 for (Instruction &I : BB)
414 if (isStatepoint(I))
415 Statepoints.push_back(&I);
416 for (auto &I : Statepoints)
417 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I);
418 }
419
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000420 return EverMadeChange;
421}
422
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000423/// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the
424/// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block,
425/// which has a single predecessor.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000426bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) {
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000427 bool Changed = false;
428 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000429 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000430 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000431 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial
432 // edge, just collapse it.
433 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
434
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +0000435 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken.
436 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000437
438 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator());
439 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) {
440 Changed = true;
Michael Liao6e12d122012-08-21 05:55:22 +0000441 DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n"<< *SinglePred << "\n\n\n");
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000442 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function.
443 // If so, we will need to move BB back to the entry position.
444 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000445 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(BB, nullptr);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000446
447 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
448 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
449
450 // We have erased a block. Update the iterator.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000451 I = BB->getIterator();
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000452 }
453 }
454 return Changed;
455}
456
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000457/// Find a destination block from BB if BB is mergeable empty block.
458BasicBlock *CodeGenPrepare::findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
459 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it.
460 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
461 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional())
462 return nullptr;
463
464 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi
465 // node, then other stuff is happening here.
466 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI->getIterator();
467 if (BBI != BB->begin()) {
468 --BBI;
469 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) {
470 if (BBI == BB->begin())
471 break;
472 --BBI;
473 }
474 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI))
475 return nullptr;
476 }
477
478 // Do not break infinite loops.
479 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
480 if (DestBB == BB)
481 return nullptr;
482
483 if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB))
484 DestBB = nullptr;
485
486 return DestBB;
487}
488
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000489// Return the unique indirectbr predecessor of a block. This may return null
490// even if such a predecessor exists, if it's not useful for splitting.
491// If a predecessor is found, OtherPreds will contain all other (non-indirectbr)
492// predecessors of BB.
493static BasicBlock *
494findIBRPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB, SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock *> &OtherPreds) {
495 // If the block doesn't have any PHIs, we don't care about it, since there's
496 // no point in splitting it.
497 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
498 if (!PN)
499 return nullptr;
500
501 // Verify we have exactly one IBR predecessor.
502 // Conservatively bail out if one of the other predecessors is not a "regular"
503 // terminator (that is, not a switch or a br).
504 BasicBlock *IBB = nullptr;
505 for (unsigned Pred = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); Pred != E; ++Pred) {
506 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(Pred);
507 TerminatorInst *PredTerm = PredBB->getTerminator();
508 switch (PredTerm->getOpcode()) {
509 case Instruction::IndirectBr:
510 if (IBB)
511 return nullptr;
512 IBB = PredBB;
513 break;
514 case Instruction::Br:
515 case Instruction::Switch:
516 OtherPreds.push_back(PredBB);
517 continue;
518 default:
519 return nullptr;
520 }
521 }
522
523 return IBB;
524}
525
526// Split critical edges where the source of the edge is an indirectbr
527// instruction. This isn't always possible, but we can handle some easy cases.
528// This is useful because MI is unable to split such critical edges,
529// which means it will not be able to sink instructions along those edges.
530// This is especially painful for indirect branches with many successors, where
531// we end up having to prepare all outgoing values in the origin block.
532//
533// Our normal algorithm for splitting critical edges requires us to update
534// the outgoing edges of the edge origin block, but for an indirectbr this
535// is hard, since it would require finding and updating the block addresses
536// the indirect branch uses. But if a block only has a single indirectbr
537// predecessor, with the others being regular branches, we can do it in a
538// different way.
539// Say we have A -> D, B -> D, I -> D where only I -> D is an indirectbr.
540// We can split D into D0 and D1, where D0 contains only the PHIs from D,
541// and D1 is the D block body. We can then duplicate D0 as D0A and D0B, and
542// create the following structure:
543// A -> D0A, B -> D0A, I -> D0B, D0A -> D1, D0B -> D1
544bool CodeGenPrepare::splitIndirectCriticalEdges(Function &F) {
545 // Check whether the function has any indirectbrs, and collect which blocks
546 // they may jump to. Since most functions don't have indirect branches,
547 // this lowers the common case's overhead to O(Blocks) instead of O(Edges).
548 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Targets;
549 for (auto &BB : F) {
550 auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB.getTerminator());
551 if (!IBI)
552 continue;
553
554 for (unsigned Succ = 0, E = IBI->getNumSuccessors(); Succ != E; ++Succ)
555 Targets.insert(IBI->getSuccessor(Succ));
556 }
557
558 if (Targets.empty())
559 return false;
560
561 bool Changed = false;
562 for (BasicBlock *Target : Targets) {
563 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> OtherPreds;
564 BasicBlock *IBRPred = findIBRPredecessor(Target, OtherPreds);
565 // If we did not found an indirectbr, or the indirectbr is the only
566 // incoming edge, this isn't the kind of edge we're looking for.
567 if (!IBRPred || OtherPreds.empty())
568 continue;
569
570 // Don't even think about ehpads/landingpads.
571 Instruction *FirstNonPHI = Target->getFirstNonPHI();
572 if (FirstNonPHI->isEHPad() || Target->isLandingPad())
573 continue;
574
575 BasicBlock *BodyBlock = Target->splitBasicBlock(FirstNonPHI, ".split");
576 // It's possible Target was its own successor through an indirectbr.
577 // In this case, the indirectbr now comes from BodyBlock.
578 if (IBRPred == Target)
579 IBRPred = BodyBlock;
580
581 // At this point Target only has PHIs, and BodyBlock has the rest of the
582 // block's body. Create a copy of Target that will be used by the "direct"
583 // preds.
584 ValueToValueMapTy VMap;
585 BasicBlock *DirectSucc = CloneBasicBlock(Target, VMap, ".clone", &F);
586
Brendon Cahoon7769a082017-04-17 19:11:04 +0000587 for (BasicBlock *Pred : OtherPreds) {
588 // If the target is a loop to itself, then the terminator of the split
589 // block needs to be updated.
590 if (Pred == Target)
591 BodyBlock->getTerminator()->replaceUsesOfWith(Target, DirectSucc);
592 else
593 Pred->getTerminator()->replaceUsesOfWith(Target, DirectSucc);
594 }
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000595
596 // Ok, now fix up the PHIs. We know the two blocks only have PHIs, and that
597 // they are clones, so the number of PHIs are the same.
598 // (a) Remove the edge coming from IBRPred from the "Direct" PHI
599 // (b) Leave that as the only edge in the "Indirect" PHI.
600 // (c) Merge the two in the body block.
601 BasicBlock::iterator Indirect = Target->begin(),
602 End = Target->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
603 BasicBlock::iterator Direct = DirectSucc->begin();
604 BasicBlock::iterator MergeInsert = BodyBlock->getFirstInsertionPt();
605
606 assert(&*End == Target->getTerminator() &&
607 "Block was expected to only contain PHIs");
608
609 while (Indirect != End) {
610 PHINode *DirPHI = cast<PHINode>(Direct);
611 PHINode *IndPHI = cast<PHINode>(Indirect);
612
613 // Now, clean up - the direct block shouldn't get the indirect value,
614 // and vice versa.
615 DirPHI->removeIncomingValue(IBRPred);
616 Direct++;
617
618 // Advance the pointer here, to avoid invalidation issues when the old
619 // PHI is erased.
620 Indirect++;
621
622 PHINode *NewIndPHI = PHINode::Create(IndPHI->getType(), 1, "ind", IndPHI);
623 NewIndPHI->addIncoming(IndPHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(IBRPred),
624 IBRPred);
625
626 // Create a PHI in the body block, to merge the direct and indirect
627 // predecessors.
628 PHINode *MergePHI =
629 PHINode::Create(IndPHI->getType(), 2, "merge", &*MergeInsert);
630 MergePHI->addIncoming(NewIndPHI, Target);
631 MergePHI->addIncoming(DirPHI, DirectSucc);
632
633 IndPHI->replaceAllUsesWith(MergePHI);
634 IndPHI->eraseFromParent();
635 }
636
637 Changed = true;
638 }
639
640 return Changed;
641}
642
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000643/// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an
644/// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split
645/// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these
646/// blocks so we can split them the way we want them.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000647bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) {
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000648 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preheaders;
649 SmallVector<Loop *, 16> LoopList(LI->begin(), LI->end());
650 while (!LoopList.empty()) {
651 Loop *L = LoopList.pop_back_val();
652 LoopList.insert(LoopList.end(), L->begin(), L->end());
653 if (BasicBlock *Preheader = L->getLoopPreheader())
654 Preheaders.insert(Preheader);
655 }
656
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000657 bool MadeChange = false;
658 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000659 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000660 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000661 BasicBlock *DestBB = findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BB);
662 if (!DestBB ||
663 !isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BB, DestBB, Preheaders.count(BB)))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000664 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000665
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000666 eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000667 MadeChange = true;
668 }
669 return MadeChange;
670}
671
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000672bool CodeGenPrepare::isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB,
673 BasicBlock *DestBB,
674 bool isPreheader) {
675 // Do not delete loop preheaders if doing so would create a critical edge.
676 // Loop preheaders can be good locations to spill registers. If the
677 // preheader is deleted and we create a critical edge, registers may be
678 // spilled in the loop body instead.
679 if (!DisablePreheaderProtect && isPreheader &&
680 !(BB->getSinglePredecessor() &&
681 BB->getSinglePredecessor()->getSingleSuccessor()))
682 return false;
683
684 // Try to skip merging if the unique predecessor of BB is terminated by a
685 // switch or indirect branch instruction, and BB is used as an incoming block
686 // of PHIs in DestBB. In such case, merging BB and DestBB would cause ISel to
687 // add COPY instructions in the predecessor of BB instead of BB (if it is not
688 // merged). Note that the critical edge created by merging such blocks wont be
689 // split in MachineSink because the jump table is not analyzable. By keeping
690 // such empty block (BB), ISel will place COPY instructions in BB, not in the
691 // predecessor of BB.
692 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getUniquePredecessor();
693 if (!Pred ||
694 !(isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()) ||
695 isa<IndirectBrInst>(Pred->getTerminator())))
696 return true;
697
698 if (BB->getTerminator() != BB->getFirstNonPHI())
699 return true;
700
701 // We use a simple cost heuristic which determine skipping merging is
702 // profitable if the cost of skipping merging is less than the cost of
703 // merging : Cost(skipping merging) < Cost(merging BB), where the
704 // Cost(skipping merging) is Freq(BB) * (Cost(Copy) + Cost(Branch)), and
705 // the Cost(merging BB) is Freq(Pred) * Cost(Copy).
706 // Assuming Cost(Copy) == Cost(Branch), we could simplify it to :
707 // Freq(Pred) / Freq(BB) > 2.
708 // Note that if there are multiple empty blocks sharing the same incoming
709 // value for the PHIs in the DestBB, we consider them together. In such
710 // case, Cost(merging BB) will be the sum of their frequencies.
711
712 if (!isa<PHINode>(DestBB->begin()))
713 return true;
714
715 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SameIncomingValueBBs;
716
717 // Find all other incoming blocks from which incoming values of all PHIs in
718 // DestBB are the same as the ones from BB.
719 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(DestBB), E = pred_end(DestBB); PI != E;
720 ++PI) {
721 BasicBlock *DestBBPred = *PI;
722 if (DestBBPred == BB)
723 continue;
724
725 bool HasAllSameValue = true;
726 BasicBlock::const_iterator DestBBI = DestBB->begin();
727 while (const PHINode *DestPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBBI++)) {
728 if (DestPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) !=
729 DestPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(DestBBPred)) {
730 HasAllSameValue = false;
731 break;
732 }
733 }
734 if (HasAllSameValue)
735 SameIncomingValueBBs.insert(DestBBPred);
736 }
737
738 // See if all BB's incoming values are same as the value from Pred. In this
739 // case, no reason to skip merging because COPYs are expected to be place in
740 // Pred already.
741 if (SameIncomingValueBBs.count(Pred))
742 return true;
743
744 if (!BFI) {
745 Function &F = *BB->getParent();
746 LoopInfo LI{DominatorTree(F)};
747 BPI.reset(new BranchProbabilityInfo(F, LI));
748 BFI.reset(new BlockFrequencyInfo(F, *BPI, LI));
749 }
750
751 BlockFrequency PredFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(Pred);
752 BlockFrequency BBFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(BB);
753
754 for (auto SameValueBB : SameIncomingValueBBs)
755 if (SameValueBB->getUniquePredecessor() == Pred &&
756 DestBB == findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(SameValueBB))
757 BBFreq += BFI->getBlockFreq(SameValueBB);
758
759 return PredFreq.getFrequency() <=
760 BBFreq.getFrequency() * FreqRatioToSkipMerge;
761}
762
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000763/// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single
764/// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000765/// instructions.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000766bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB,
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000767 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const {
768 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in
769 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders),
770 // don't mess around with them.
771 BasicBlock::const_iterator BBI = BB->begin();
772 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000773 for (const User *U : PN->users()) {
774 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
775 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000776 return false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000777 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check
778 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000779 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000780 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) {
781 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000782 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
783 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I));
784 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB &&
785 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I))
786 return false;
787 }
788 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000789 }
790 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000791
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000792 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB
793 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we
794 // can't merge the block.
795 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin());
796 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict.
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000797
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000798 // Collect the preds of BB.
Chris Lattner8201a9b2007-11-06 22:07:40 +0000799 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds;
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000800 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
801 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator.
802 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
803 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
804 } else {
805 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
806 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000807
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000808 // Walk the preds of DestBB.
809 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
810 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i);
811 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor?
812 BBI = DestBB->begin();
813 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
814 const Value *V1 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
815 const Value *V2 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000816
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000817 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be.
818 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2))
819 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB)
820 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000821
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000822 // If there is a conflict, bail out.
823 if (V1 != V2) return false;
824 }
825 }
826 }
827
828 return true;
829}
830
831
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000832/// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in
833/// it.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000834void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000835 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
836 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000837
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000838 DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" << *BB << *DestBB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000839
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000840 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge,
841 // just collapse it.
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000842 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000843 if (SinglePred != DestBB) {
844 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function. If so, we
845 // will need to move BB back to the entry position.
846 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000847 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(DestBB, nullptr);
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000848
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000849 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
850 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000851
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000852 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000853 return;
854 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000855 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000856
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000857 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB
858 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have.
859 PHINode *PN;
860 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = DestBB->begin();
861 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
862 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it.
863 Value *InVal = PN->removeIncomingValue(BB, false);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000864
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000865 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some
866 // value that dominates BB.
867 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal);
868 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) {
869 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi.
870 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
871 PN->addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i),
872 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i));
873 } else {
874 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that
875 // we will be adding.
876 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
877 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
878 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
879 } else {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000880 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
881 PN->addIncoming(InVal, *PI);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000882 }
883 }
884 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000885
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000886 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use
887 // DestBB and remove BB.
888 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB);
889 BB->eraseFromParent();
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000890 ++NumBlocksElim;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000891
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000892 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000893}
894
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000895// Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding
896// derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls
897static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000898 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &AllRelocateCalls,
899 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>>
900 &RelocateInstMap) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000901 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object
902 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding
903 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000904 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, GCRelocateInst *> RelocateIdxMap;
905 for (auto *ThisRelocate : AllRelocateCalls) {
906 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate->getBasePtrIndex(),
907 ThisRelocate->getDerivedPtrIndex());
908 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, ThisRelocate));
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000909 }
910 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) {
911 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first;
912 if (Key.first == Key.second)
913 // Base relocation: nothing to insert
914 continue;
915
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000916 GCRelocateInst *I = Item.second;
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000917 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first);
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000918
919 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it.
920 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey);
921 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end())
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000922 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off
923 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates.
924 continue;
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000925
926 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000927 }
928}
929
930// Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all
931// small integer constants
932static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP,
933 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) {
934 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) {
935 // Only accept small constant integer operands
936 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i));
937 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20)
938 return false;
939 }
940
941 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++)
942 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i));
943 return true;
944}
945
946// Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to
947// replace, computes a replacement, and affects it.
948static bool
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000949simplifyRelocatesOffABase(GCRelocateInst *RelocatedBase,
950 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &Targets) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000951 bool MadeChange = false;
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000952 for (GCRelocateInst *ToReplace : Targets) {
953 assert(ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex() &&
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000954 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object");
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000955 if (ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == ToReplace->getDerivedPtrIndex()) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000956 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates.
957 continue;
958 }
959
Igor Laevskyf637b4a2015-11-03 18:37:40 +0000960 if (RelocatedBase->getParent() != ToReplace->getParent()) {
961 // Base and derived relocates are in different basic blocks.
962 // In this case transform is only valid when base dominates derived
963 // relocate. However it would be too expensive to check dominance
964 // for each such relocate, so we skip the whole transformation.
965 continue;
966 }
967
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000968 Value *Base = ToReplace->getBasePtr();
969 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ToReplace->getDerivedPtr());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000970 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base)
971 continue;
972
973 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV;
974 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV))
975 continue;
976
977 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep
Sanjay Patel545a4562016-01-20 18:59:16 +0000978 assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() &&
979 "Should always have one since it's not a terminator");
Sanjoy Das3d705e32015-05-11 23:47:30 +0000980
981 // Insert after RelocatedBase
982 IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000983 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000984
985 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type.
986 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not
987 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be
988 // cases like this:
989 // bb1:
990 // ...
991 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
992 // br label %merge
993 //
994 // bb2:
995 // ...
996 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
997 // br label %merge
998 //
999 // merge:
1000 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ]
1001 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)*
1002 //
1003 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast
1004 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and
1005 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes.
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001006 Value *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase;
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001007 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) {
1008 ActualRelocatedBase =
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001009 Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001010 }
David Blaikie68d535c2015-03-24 22:38:16 +00001011 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP(
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001012 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV));
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001013 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace);
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001014 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived
1015 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above.
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001016 Value *ActualReplacement = Replacement;
1017 if (Replacement->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) {
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001018 ActualReplacement =
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001019 Builder.CreateBitCast(Replacement, ToReplace->getType());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001020 }
1021 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001022 ToReplace->eraseFromParent();
1023
1024 MadeChange = true;
1025 }
1026 return MadeChange;
1027}
1028
1029// Turns this:
1030//
1031// %base = ...
1032// %ptr = gep %base + 15
1033// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
1034// %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
1035// %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5)
1036// %val = load %ptr'
1037//
1038// into this:
1039//
1040// %base = ...
1041// %ptr = gep %base + 15
1042// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
1043// %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
1044// %ptr' = gep %base' + 15
1045// %val = load %ptr'
1046bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) {
1047 bool MadeChange = false;
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001048 SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2> AllRelocateCalls;
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001049
1050 for (auto *U : I.users())
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001051 if (GCRelocateInst *Relocate = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(U))
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001052 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001053 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(Relocate);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001054
1055 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer
1056 // relocation to mangle
1057 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2)
1058 return false;
1059
1060 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the
1061 // corresponding derived relocate instructions
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001062 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap;
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001063 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap);
1064 if (RelocateInstMap.empty())
1065 return false;
1066
1067 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap)
1068 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against
1069 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace
1070 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second);
1071 return MadeChange;
1072}
1073
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001074/// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks
1075static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001076 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001077
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001078 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001079 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001080
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001081 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001082 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001083 UI != E; ) {
1084 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1085 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001086
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001087 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the
1088 // appropriate predecessor block.
1089 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1090 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001091 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001092 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001093
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001094 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1095 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001096
David Majnemer0c80e2e2016-04-27 19:36:38 +00001097 // The first insertion point of a block containing an EH pad is after the
1098 // pad. If the pad is the user, we cannot sink the cast past the pad.
1099 if (User->isEHPad())
1100 continue;
1101
Andrew Kaylord0430e82015-11-23 19:16:15 +00001102 // If the block selected to receive the cast is an EH pad that does not
1103 // allow non-PHI instructions before the terminator, we can't sink the
1104 // cast.
1105 if (UserBB->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
1106 continue;
1107
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001108 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast.
1109 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001110
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001111 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it.
1112 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB];
1113
1114 if (!InsertedCast) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00001115 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001116 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
1117 InsertedCast = CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0),
1118 CI->getType(), "", &*InsertPt);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001119 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001120
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001121 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001122 TheUse = InsertedCast;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001123 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00001124 ++NumCastUses;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001125 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001126
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001127 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast.
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +00001128 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001129 CI->eraseFromParent();
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +00001130 MadeChange = true;
1131 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001132
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001133 return MadeChange;
1134}
1135
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001136/// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from
1137/// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to
1138/// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced.
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001139///
1140/// Return true if any changes are made.
1141///
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001142static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI,
1143 const DataLayout &DL) {
Justin Lebar3e50a5b2016-11-21 22:49:15 +00001144 // Sink only "cheap" (or nop) address-space casts. This is a weaker condition
1145 // than sinking only nop casts, but is helpful on some platforms.
1146 if (auto *ASC = dyn_cast<AddrSpaceCastInst>(CI)) {
1147 if (!TLI.isCheapAddrSpaceCast(ASC->getSrcAddressSpace(),
1148 ASC->getDestAddressSpace()))
1149 return false;
1150 }
1151
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001152 // If this is a noop copy,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001153 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType());
1154 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType());
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001155
1156 // This is an fp<->int conversion?
1157 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger())
1158 return false;
1159
1160 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which
1161 // isn't a noop.
1162 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false;
1163
1164 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted
1165 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they
1166 // are.
1167 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) ==
1168 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
1169 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT);
1170 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) ==
1171 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
1172 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT);
1173
1174 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy.
1175 if (SrcVT != DstVT)
1176 return false;
1177
1178 return SinkCast(CI);
1179}
1180
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001181/// Try to combine CI into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow intrinsic if
1182/// possible.
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +00001183///
1184/// Return true if any changes were made.
1185static bool CombineUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *CI) {
1186 Value *A, *B;
1187 Instruction *AddI;
1188 if (!match(CI,
1189 m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_Instruction(AddI))))
1190 return false;
1191
1192 Type *Ty = AddI->getType();
1193 if (!isa<IntegerType>(Ty))
1194 return false;
1195
1196 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we we
1197 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic
1198 // block containing the icmp:
1199
1200 if (AddI->getParent() != CI->getParent() && !AddI->hasOneUse())
1201 return false;
1202
1203#ifndef NDEBUG
1204 // Someday m_UAddWithOverflow may get smarter, but this is a safe assumption
1205 // for now:
1206 if (AddI->hasOneUse())
1207 assert(*AddI->user_begin() == CI && "expected!");
1208#endif
1209
Sanjay Patelaf674fb2015-12-14 17:24:23 +00001210 Module *M = CI->getModule();
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +00001211 Value *F = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, Ty);
1212
1213 auto *InsertPt = AddI->hasOneUse() ? CI : AddI;
1214
1215 auto *UAddWithOverflow =
1216 CallInst::Create(F, {A, B}, "uadd.overflow", InsertPt);
1217 auto *UAdd = ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 0, "uadd", InsertPt);
1218 auto *Overflow =
1219 ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 1, "overflow", InsertPt);
1220
1221 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Overflow);
1222 AddI->replaceAllUsesWith(UAdd);
1223 CI->eraseFromParent();
1224 AddI->eraseFromParent();
1225 return true;
1226}
1227
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001228/// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual
1229/// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on
1230/// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might
1231/// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001232///
1233/// Return true if any changes are made.
Peter Zotov8efe38a2016-04-03 19:32:13 +00001234static bool SinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001235 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001236
Peter Zotov0b6d7bc2016-04-03 16:36:17 +00001237 // Avoid sinking soft-FP comparisons, since this can move them into a loop.
Peter Zotov8efe38a2016-04-03 19:32:13 +00001238 if (TLI && TLI->useSoftFloat() && isa<FCmpInst>(CI))
Peter Zotov0b6d7bc2016-04-03 16:36:17 +00001239 return false;
1240
1241 // Only insert a cmp in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001242 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001243
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001244 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001245 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001246 UI != E; ) {
1247 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1248 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001249
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001250 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1251 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001252
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001253 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1254 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1255 continue;
1256
1257 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in.
1258 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001259
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001260 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp.
1261 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001262
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001263 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it.
1264 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB];
1265
1266 if (!InsertedCmp) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00001267 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001268 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001269 InsertedCmp =
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001270 CmpInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getPredicate(),
1271 CI->getOperand(0), CI->getOperand(1), "", &*InsertPt);
Wolfgang Piebe51bede2016-10-06 21:43:45 +00001272 // Propagate the debug info.
1273 InsertedCmp->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc());
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001274 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001275
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001276 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp.
1277 TheUse = InsertedCmp;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001278 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00001279 ++NumCmpUses;
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001280 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001281
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001282 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp.
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001283 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001284 CI->eraseFromParent();
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001285 MadeChange = true;
1286 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001287
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001288 return MadeChange;
1289}
1290
Peter Zotovf87e5502016-04-03 17:11:53 +00001291static bool OptimizeCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) {
Peter Zotov8efe38a2016-04-03 19:32:13 +00001292 if (SinkCmpExpression(CI, TLI))
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +00001293 return true;
1294
1295 if (CombineUAddWithOverflow(CI))
1296 return true;
1297
1298 return false;
1299}
1300
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00001301/// Duplicate and sink the given 'and' instruction into user blocks where it is
1302/// used in a compare to allow isel to generate better code for targets where
1303/// this operation can be combined.
1304///
1305/// Return true if any changes are made.
1306static bool sinkAndCmp0Expression(Instruction *AndI,
1307 const TargetLowering &TLI,
1308 SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts) {
1309 // Double-check that we're not trying to optimize an instruction that was
1310 // already optimized by some other part of this pass.
1311 assert(!InsertedInsts.count(AndI) &&
1312 "Attempting to optimize already optimized and instruction");
1313 (void) InsertedInsts;
1314
1315 // Nothing to do for single use in same basic block.
1316 if (AndI->hasOneUse() &&
1317 AndI->getParent() == cast<Instruction>(*AndI->user_begin())->getParent())
1318 return false;
1319
1320 // Try to avoid cases where sinking/duplicating is likely to increase register
1321 // pressure.
1322 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(0)) &&
1323 !isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(1)) &&
1324 AndI->getOperand(0)->hasOneUse() && AndI->getOperand(1)->hasOneUse())
1325 return false;
1326
1327 for (auto *U : AndI->users()) {
1328 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U);
1329
1330 // Only sink for and mask feeding icmp with 0.
1331 if (!isa<ICmpInst>(User))
1332 return false;
1333
1334 auto *CmpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1));
1335 if (!CmpC || !CmpC->isZero())
1336 return false;
1337 }
1338
1339 if (!TLI.isMaskAndCmp0FoldingBeneficial(*AndI))
1340 return false;
1341
1342 DEBUG(dbgs() << "found 'and' feeding only icmp 0;\n");
1343 DEBUG(AndI->getParent()->dump());
1344
1345 // Push the 'and' into the same block as the icmp 0. There should only be
1346 // one (icmp (and, 0)) in each block, since CSE/GVN should have removed any
1347 // others, so we don't need to keep track of which BBs we insert into.
1348 for (Value::user_iterator UI = AndI->user_begin(), E = AndI->user_end();
1349 UI != E; ) {
1350 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1351 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1352
1353 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1354 ++UI;
1355
1356 DEBUG(dbgs() << "sinking 'and' use: " << *User << "\n");
1357
1358 // Keep the 'and' in the same place if the use is already in the same block.
1359 Instruction *InsertPt =
1360 User->getParent() == AndI->getParent() ? AndI : User;
1361 Instruction *InsertedAnd =
1362 BinaryOperator::Create(Instruction::And, AndI->getOperand(0),
1363 AndI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt);
1364 // Propagate the debug info.
1365 InsertedAnd->setDebugLoc(AndI->getDebugLoc());
1366
1367 // Replace a use of the 'and' with a use of the new 'and'.
1368 TheUse = InsertedAnd;
1369 ++NumAndUses;
1370 DEBUG(User->getParent()->dump());
1371 }
1372
1373 // We removed all uses, nuke the and.
1374 AndI->eraseFromParent();
1375 return true;
1376}
1377
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001378/// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which
1379/// includes:
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001380/// 1. Truncate instruction
1381/// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits:
1382/// imm & (imm+1) == 0
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +00001383static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001384 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) {
1385 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And ||
1386 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)))
1387 return false;
1388
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +00001389 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue();
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001390
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +00001391 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue())
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001392 return false;
1393 }
1394 return true;
1395}
1396
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001397/// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB.
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +00001398static bool
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001399SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI,
1400 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001401 const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001402 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1403 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs;
1404 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User);
1405 bool MadeChange = false;
1406
1407 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(),
1408 TruncE = TruncI->user_end();
1409 TruncUI != TruncE;) {
1410
1411 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse();
1412 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI);
1413 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1414
1415 ++TruncUI;
1416
1417 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode());
1418 if (!ISDOpcode)
1419 continue;
1420
Tim Northovere2239ff2014-07-29 10:20:22 +00001421 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an
1422 // implicit truncate.
1423 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an
1424 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the
1425 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though.
Ahmed Bougacha0788d492014-11-12 22:16:55 +00001426 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001427 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true)))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001428 continue;
1429
1430 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1431 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser))
1432 continue;
1433
1434 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent();
1435
1436 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB)
1437 continue;
1438
1439 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB];
1440 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB];
1441
1442 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) {
1443 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001444 assert(InsertPt != TruncUserBB->end());
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001445 // Sink the shift
1446 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001447 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1448 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001449 else
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001450 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1451 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001452
1453 // Sink the trunc
1454 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1455 TruncInsertPt++;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001456 assert(TruncInsertPt != TruncUserBB->end());
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001457
1458 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001459 TruncI->getType(), "", &*TruncInsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001460
1461 MadeChange = true;
1462
1463 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc;
1464 }
1465 }
1466 return MadeChange;
1467}
1468
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001469/// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could
1470/// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract
1471/// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract
1472/// instruction. Here is an example:
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001473/// BB1:
1474/// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1475/// BB2:
1476/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16
1477/// ==>
1478///
1479/// BB2:
1480/// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1481/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16
1482///
1483/// CodeGen will recoginze the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract
1484/// instruction.
1485/// Return true if any changes are made.
1486static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001487 const TargetLowering &TLI,
1488 const DataLayout &DL) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001489 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent();
1490
1491 /// Only insert instructions in each block once.
1492 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts;
1493
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001494 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType()));
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001495
1496 bool MadeChange = false;
1497 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end();
1498 UI != E;) {
1499 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1500 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1501 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1502 ++UI;
1503
1504 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1505 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1506 continue;
1507
1508 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User))
1509 continue;
1510
1511 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1512
1513 if (UserBB == DefBB) {
1514 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of
1515 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not
1516 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate
1517 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse.
1518 // for example:
1519 // BB1:
1520 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm
1521 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16
1522 //
1523 // BB2:
1524 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does
1525 // not have i16 compare.
1526 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2
1527 //
1528 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal
1529 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no trucate will be
1530 // introduced in other basic blocks.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001531 &&
1532 (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType()))))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001533 MadeChange =
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001534 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001535
1536 continue;
1537 }
1538 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it.
1539 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB];
1540
1541 if (!InsertedShift) {
1542 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001543 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001544
1545 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001546 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1547 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001548 else
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001549 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1550 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001551
1552 MadeChange = true;
1553 }
1554
1555 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift.
1556 TheUse = InsertedShift;
1557 }
1558
1559 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift.
1560 if (ShiftI->use_empty())
1561 ShiftI->eraseFromParent();
1562
1563 return MadeChange;
1564}
1565
Sanjay Patel4699b8a2015-11-19 16:37:10 +00001566/// If counting leading or trailing zeros is an expensive operation and a zero
1567/// input is defined, add a check for zero to avoid calling the intrinsic.
1568///
1569/// We want to transform:
1570/// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 false)
1571///
1572/// into:
1573/// entry:
1574/// %cmpz = icmp eq i64 %A, 0
1575/// br i1 %cmpz, label %cond.end, label %cond.false
1576/// cond.false:
1577/// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 true)
1578/// br label %cond.end
1579/// cond.end:
1580/// %ctz = phi i64 [ 64, %entry ], [ %z, %cond.false ]
1581///
1582/// If the transform is performed, return true and set ModifiedDT to true.
1583static bool despeculateCountZeros(IntrinsicInst *CountZeros,
1584 const TargetLowering *TLI,
1585 const DataLayout *DL,
1586 bool &ModifiedDT) {
1587 if (!TLI || !DL)
1588 return false;
1589
1590 // If a zero input is undefined, it doesn't make sense to despeculate that.
1591 if (match(CountZeros->getOperand(1), m_One()))
1592 return false;
1593
1594 // If it's cheap to speculate, there's nothing to do.
1595 auto IntrinsicID = CountZeros->getIntrinsicID();
1596 if ((IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::cttz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCttz()) ||
1597 (IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::ctlz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCtlz()))
1598 return false;
1599
1600 // Only handle legal scalar cases. Anything else requires too much work.
1601 Type *Ty = CountZeros->getType();
1602 unsigned SizeInBits = Ty->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Jun Bum Limbe11bdc2016-05-13 18:38:35 +00001603 if (Ty->isVectorTy() || SizeInBits > DL->getLargestLegalIntTypeSizeInBits())
Sanjay Patel4699b8a2015-11-19 16:37:10 +00001604 return false;
1605
1606 // The intrinsic will be sunk behind a compare against zero and branch.
1607 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CountZeros->getParent();
1608 BasicBlock *CallBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CountZeros, "cond.false");
1609
1610 // Create another block after the count zero intrinsic. A PHI will be added
1611 // in this block to select the result of the intrinsic or the bit-width
1612 // constant if the input to the intrinsic is zero.
1613 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(CountZeros));
1614 BasicBlock *EndBlock = CallBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "cond.end");
1615
1616 // Set up a builder to create a compare, conditional branch, and PHI.
1617 IRBuilder<> Builder(CountZeros->getContext());
1618 Builder.SetInsertPoint(StartBlock->getTerminator());
1619 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CountZeros->getDebugLoc());
1620
1621 // Replace the unconditional branch that was created by the first split with
1622 // a compare against zero and a conditional branch.
1623 Value *Zero = Constant::getNullValue(Ty);
1624 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(CountZeros->getOperand(0), Zero, "cmpz");
1625 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, EndBlock, CallBlock);
1626 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
1627
1628 // Create a PHI in the end block to select either the output of the intrinsic
1629 // or the bit width of the operand.
1630 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front());
1631 PHINode *PN = Builder.CreatePHI(Ty, 2, "ctz");
1632 CountZeros->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
1633 Value *BitWidth = Builder.getInt(APInt(SizeInBits, SizeInBits));
1634 PN->addIncoming(BitWidth, StartBlock);
1635 PN->addIncoming(CountZeros, CallBlock);
1636
1637 // We are explicitly handling the zero case, so we can set the intrinsic's
1638 // undefined zero argument to 'true'. This will also prevent reprocessing the
1639 // intrinsic; we only despeculate when a zero input is defined.
1640 CountZeros->setArgOperand(1, Builder.getTrue());
1641 ModifiedDT = true;
1642 return true;
1643}
1644
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001645// This class provides helper functions to expand a memcmp library call into an
1646// inline expansion.
1647class MemCmpExpansion {
1648 struct ResultBlock {
1649 BasicBlock *BB;
1650 PHINode *PhiSrc1;
1651 PHINode *PhiSrc2;
1652 ResultBlock();
1653 };
1654
1655 CallInst *CI;
1656 ResultBlock ResBlock;
1657 unsigned MaxLoadSize;
1658 unsigned NumBlocks;
1659 unsigned NumBlocksNonOneByte;
1660 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock;
1661 std::vector<BasicBlock *> LoadCmpBlocks;
1662 BasicBlock *EndBlock;
1663 PHINode *PhiRes;
1664 bool IsUsedForZeroCmp;
1665 int calculateNumBlocks(unsigned Size);
1666 void createLoadCmpBlocks();
1667 void createResultBlock();
1668 void setupResultBlockPHINodes();
1669 void setupEndBlockPHINodes();
1670 void emitLoadCompareBlock(unsigned Index, int LoadSize, int GEPIndex,
1671 bool IsLittleEndian);
1672 void emitLoadCompareBlockMultipleLoads(unsigned Index, unsigned Size,
1673 unsigned &NumBytesProcessed);
1674 void emitLoadCompareByteBlock(unsigned Index, int GEPIndex);
1675 void emitMemCmpResultBlock(bool IsLittleEndian);
1676 Value *getMemCmpExpansionZeroCase(unsigned Size, bool IsLittleEndian);
1677 unsigned getLoadSize(unsigned Size);
1678 unsigned getNumLoads(unsigned Size);
1679
1680public:
1681 MemCmpExpansion(CallInst *CI, unsigned MaxLoadSize,
1682 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock);
1683 Value *getMemCmpExpansion(bool IsLittleEndian);
1684};
1685
1686MemCmpExpansion::ResultBlock::ResultBlock()
1687 : BB(nullptr), PhiSrc1(nullptr), PhiSrc2(nullptr) {}
1688
1689// Initialize the basic block structure required for expansion of memcmp call
1690// with given maximum load size and memcmp size parameter.
1691// This structure includes:
1692// 1. A list of load compare blocks - LoadCmpBlocks.
1693// 2. An EndBlock, split from original instruction point, which is the block to
1694// return from.
1695// 3. ResultBlock, block to branch to for early exit when a
1696// LoadCmpBlock finds a difference.
1697MemCmpExpansion::MemCmpExpansion(CallInst *CI, unsigned MaxLoadSize,
1698 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock)
1699 : CI(CI), MaxLoadSize(MaxLoadSize), NumLoadsPerBlock(NumLoadsPerBlock) {
1700
1701 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1702
1703 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CI->getParent();
1704 EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CI, "endblock");
1705 setupEndBlockPHINodes();
1706 IsUsedForZeroCmp = isOnlyUsedInZeroEqualityComparison(CI);
1707
1708 ConstantInt *SizeCast = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CI->getArgOperand(2));
1709 uint64_t Size = SizeCast->getZExtValue();
1710
1711 // Calculate how many load compare blocks are required for an expansion of
1712 // given Size.
1713 NumBlocks = calculateNumBlocks(Size);
1714 createResultBlock();
1715
1716 // If return value of memcmp is not used in a zero equality, we need to
1717 // calculate which source was larger. The calculation requires the
1718 // two loaded source values of each load compare block.
1719 // These will be saved in the phi nodes created by setupResultBlockPHINodes.
1720 if (!IsUsedForZeroCmp)
1721 setupResultBlockPHINodes();
1722
1723 // Create the number of required load compare basic blocks.
1724 createLoadCmpBlocks();
1725
1726 // Update the terminator added by splitBasicBlock to branch to the first
1727 // LoadCmpBlock.
1728 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CI->getDebugLoc());
1729 StartBlock->getTerminator()->setSuccessor(0, LoadCmpBlocks[0]);
1730}
1731
1732void MemCmpExpansion::createLoadCmpBlocks() {
1733 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumBlocks; i++) {
1734 BasicBlock *BB = BasicBlock::Create(CI->getContext(), "loadbb",
1735 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
1736 LoadCmpBlocks.push_back(BB);
1737 }
1738}
1739
1740void MemCmpExpansion::createResultBlock() {
1741 ResBlock.BB = BasicBlock::Create(CI->getContext(), "res_block",
1742 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
1743}
1744
1745// This function creates the IR instructions for loading and comparing 1 byte.
1746// It loads 1 byte from each source of the memcmp paramters with the given
1747// GEPIndex. It then subtracts the two loaded values and adds this result to the
1748// final phi node for selecting the memcmp result.
1749void MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareByteBlock(unsigned Index, int GEPIndex) {
1750 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1751
1752 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1753 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1754
1755 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1756 Type *LoadSizeType = Type::getInt8Ty(CI->getContext());
1757 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*
1758 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1759 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1760 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1761 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1762
1763 // Get the base address using the GEPIndex
1764 if (GEPIndex != 0) {
1765 Source1 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source1,
1766 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1767 Source2 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source2,
1768 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1769 }
1770
1771 Value *LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
1772 Value *LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
1773
1774 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc1, Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()));
1775 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc2, Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()));
1776 Value *Diff = Builder.CreateSub(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
1777
1778 PhiRes->addIncoming(Diff, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1779
1780 if (Index < (LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1)) {
1781 // Early exit branch if difference found to EndBlock, otherwise continue to
1782 // next LoadCmpBlock
1783
1784 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_NE, Diff,
1785 ConstantInt::get(Diff->getType(), 0));
1786 BranchInst *CmpBr =
1787 BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, LoadCmpBlocks[Index + 1], Cmp);
1788 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1789 } else {
1790 // The last block has an unconditional branch to EndBlock
1791 BranchInst *CmpBr = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock);
1792 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1793 }
1794}
1795
1796unsigned MemCmpExpansion::getNumLoads(unsigned Size) {
1797 return (Size / MaxLoadSize) + countPopulation(Size % MaxLoadSize);
1798}
1799
1800unsigned MemCmpExpansion::getLoadSize(unsigned Size) {
1801 return MinAlign(PowerOf2Floor(Size), MaxLoadSize);
1802}
1803
1804void MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareBlockMultipleLoads(
1805 unsigned Index, unsigned Size, unsigned &NumBytesProcessed) {
1806
1807 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1808
1809 std::vector<Value *> XorList, OrList;
1810 Value *Diff;
1811
1812 unsigned RemainingBytes = Size - NumBytesProcessed;
1813 unsigned NumLoadsRemaining = getNumLoads(RemainingBytes);
1814 unsigned NumLoads = std::min(NumLoadsRemaining, NumLoadsPerBlock);
1815
1816 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1817
1818 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumLoads; ++i) {
1819 unsigned LoadSize = getLoadSize(RemainingBytes);
1820 unsigned GEPIndex = NumBytesProcessed / LoadSize;
1821 NumBytesProcessed += LoadSize;
1822 RemainingBytes -= LoadSize;
1823
1824 Type *LoadSizeType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), LoadSize * 8);
1825 Type *MaxLoadType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), MaxLoadSize * 8);
1826
1827 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1828 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1829
1830 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*
1831 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1832 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1833 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1834 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1835
1836 // Get the base address using the GEPIndex
1837 if (GEPIndex != 0) {
1838 Source1 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source1,
1839 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1840 Source2 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source2,
1841 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1842 }
1843
1844 // Load LoadSizeType from the base address
1845 Value *LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
1846 Value *LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
1847 if (LoadSizeType != MaxLoadType) {
1848 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(LoadSrc1, MaxLoadType);
1849 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(LoadSrc2, MaxLoadType);
1850 }
1851 Diff = Builder.CreateXor(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
1852 Diff = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Diff, MaxLoadType);
1853 XorList.push_back(Diff);
1854 }
1855
1856 auto pairWiseOr = [&](std::vector<Value *> &InList) -> std::vector<Value *> {
1857 std::vector<Value *> OutList;
1858 for (unsigned i = 0; i < InList.size() - 1; i = i + 2) {
1859 Value *Or = Builder.CreateOr(InList[i], InList[i + 1]);
1860 OutList.push_back(Or);
1861 }
1862 if (InList.size() % 2 != 0)
1863 OutList.push_back(InList.back());
1864 return OutList;
1865 };
1866
1867 // Pair wise OR the XOR results
1868 OrList = pairWiseOr(XorList);
1869
1870 // Pair wise OR the OR results until one result left
1871 while (OrList.size() != 1) {
1872 OrList = pairWiseOr(OrList);
1873 }
1874
1875 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_NE, OrList[0],
1876 ConstantInt::get(Diff->getType(), 0));
1877 BasicBlock *NextBB = (Index == (LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1))
1878 ? EndBlock
1879 : LoadCmpBlocks[Index + 1];
1880 // Early exit branch if difference found to ResultBlock, otherwise continue to
1881 // next LoadCmpBlock or EndBlock.
1882 BranchInst *CmpBr = BranchInst::Create(ResBlock.BB, NextBB, Cmp);
1883 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1884
1885 // Add a phi edge for the last LoadCmpBlock to Endblock with a value of 0
1886 // since early exit to ResultBlock was not taken (no difference was found in
1887 // any of the bytes)
1888 if (Index == LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1) {
1889 Value *Zero = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 0);
1890 PhiRes->addIncoming(Zero, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1891 }
1892}
1893
1894// This function creates the IR intructions for loading and comparing using the
1895// given LoadSize. It loads the number of bytes specified by LoadSize from each
1896// source of the memcmp parameters. It then does a subtract to see if there was
1897// a difference in the loaded values. If a difference is found, it branches
1898// with an early exit to the ResultBlock for calculating which source was
1899// larger. Otherwise, it falls through to the either the next LoadCmpBlock or
1900// the EndBlock if this is the last LoadCmpBlock. Loading 1 byte is handled with
1901// a special case through emitLoadCompareByteBlock. The special handling can
1902// simply subtract the loaded values and add it to the result phi node.
1903void MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareBlock(unsigned Index, int LoadSize,
1904 int GEPIndex, bool IsLittleEndian) {
1905 if (LoadSize == 1) {
1906 MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareByteBlock(Index, GEPIndex);
1907 return;
1908 }
1909
1910 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1911
1912 Type *LoadSizeType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), LoadSize * 8);
1913 Type *MaxLoadType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), MaxLoadSize * 8);
1914
1915 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1916 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1917
1918 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1919 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*
1920 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1921 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1922 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1923 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1924
1925 // Get the base address using the GEPIndex
1926 if (GEPIndex != 0) {
1927 Source1 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source1,
1928 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1929 Source2 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source2,
1930 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1931 }
1932
1933 // Load LoadSizeType from the base address
1934 Value *LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
1935 Value *LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
1936
1937 if (IsLittleEndian) {
1938 Function *F = LoadCmpBlocks[Index]->getParent();
1939
1940 Function *Bswap = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(F->getParent(),
1941 Intrinsic::bswap, LoadSizeType);
1942 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateCall(Bswap, LoadSrc1);
1943 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateCall(Bswap, LoadSrc2);
1944 }
1945
1946 if (LoadSizeType != MaxLoadType) {
1947 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(LoadSrc1, MaxLoadType);
1948 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(LoadSrc2, MaxLoadType);
1949 }
1950
1951 // Add the loaded values to the phi nodes for calculating memcmp result only
1952 // if result is not used in a zero equality.
1953 if (!IsUsedForZeroCmp) {
1954 ResBlock.PhiSrc1->addIncoming(LoadSrc1, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1955 ResBlock.PhiSrc2->addIncoming(LoadSrc2, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1956 }
1957
1958 Value *Diff = Builder.CreateSub(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
1959
1960 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_NE, Diff,
1961 ConstantInt::get(Diff->getType(), 0));
1962 BasicBlock *NextBB = (Index == (LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1))
1963 ? EndBlock
1964 : LoadCmpBlocks[Index + 1];
1965 // Early exit branch if difference found to ResultBlock, otherwise continue to
1966 // next LoadCmpBlock or EndBlock.
1967 BranchInst *CmpBr = BranchInst::Create(ResBlock.BB, NextBB, Cmp);
1968 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1969
1970 // Add a phi edge for the last LoadCmpBlock to Endblock with a value of 0
1971 // since early exit to ResultBlock was not taken (no difference was found in
1972 // any of the bytes)
1973 if (Index == LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1) {
1974 Value *Zero = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 0);
1975 PhiRes->addIncoming(Zero, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1976 }
1977}
1978
1979// This function populates the ResultBlock with a sequence to calculate the
1980// memcmp result. It compares the two loaded source values and returns -1 if
1981// src1 < src2 and 1 if src1 > src2.
1982void MemCmpExpansion::emitMemCmpResultBlock(bool IsLittleEndian) {
1983 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1984
1985 // Special case: if memcmp result is used in a zero equality, result does not
1986 // need to be calculated and can simply return 1.
1987 if (IsUsedForZeroCmp) {
1988 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = ResBlock.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1989 Builder.SetInsertPoint(ResBlock.BB, InsertPt);
1990 Value *Res = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 1);
1991 PhiRes->addIncoming(Res, ResBlock.BB);
1992 BranchInst *NewBr = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock);
1993 Builder.Insert(NewBr);
1994 return;
1995 }
1996 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = ResBlock.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1997 Builder.SetInsertPoint(ResBlock.BB, InsertPt);
1998
1999 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT, ResBlock.PhiSrc1,
2000 ResBlock.PhiSrc2);
2001
2002 Value *Res =
2003 Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ConstantInt::get(Builder.getInt32Ty(), -1),
2004 ConstantInt::get(Builder.getInt32Ty(), 1));
2005
2006 BranchInst *NewBr = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock);
2007 Builder.Insert(NewBr);
2008 PhiRes->addIncoming(Res, ResBlock.BB);
2009}
2010
2011int MemCmpExpansion::calculateNumBlocks(unsigned Size) {
2012 int NumBlocks = 0;
2013 bool haveOneByteLoad = false;
2014 unsigned RemainingSize = Size;
2015 unsigned LoadSize = MaxLoadSize;
2016 while (RemainingSize) {
2017 if (LoadSize == 1)
2018 haveOneByteLoad = true;
2019 NumBlocks += RemainingSize / LoadSize;
2020 RemainingSize = RemainingSize % LoadSize;
2021 LoadSize = LoadSize / 2;
2022 }
2023 NumBlocksNonOneByte = haveOneByteLoad ? (NumBlocks - 1) : NumBlocks;
2024
2025 if (IsUsedForZeroCmp)
2026 NumBlocks = NumBlocks / NumLoadsPerBlock +
2027 (NumBlocks % NumLoadsPerBlock != 0 ? 1 : 0);
2028
2029 return NumBlocks;
2030}
2031
2032void MemCmpExpansion::setupResultBlockPHINodes() {
2033 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
2034 Type *MaxLoadType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), MaxLoadSize * 8);
2035 Builder.SetInsertPoint(ResBlock.BB);
2036 ResBlock.PhiSrc1 =
2037 Builder.CreatePHI(MaxLoadType, NumBlocksNonOneByte, "phi.src1");
2038 ResBlock.PhiSrc2 =
2039 Builder.CreatePHI(MaxLoadType, NumBlocksNonOneByte, "phi.src2");
2040}
2041
2042void MemCmpExpansion::setupEndBlockPHINodes() {
2043 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
2044
2045 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front());
2046 PhiRes = Builder.CreatePHI(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 2, "phi.res");
2047}
2048
2049Value *MemCmpExpansion::getMemCmpExpansionZeroCase(unsigned Size,
2050 bool IsLittleEndian) {
2051 unsigned NumBytesProcessed = 0;
2052 // This loop populates each of the LoadCmpBlocks with IR sequence to handle
2053 // multiple loads per block
2054 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumBlocks; ++i) {
2055 emitLoadCompareBlockMultipleLoads(i, Size, NumBytesProcessed);
2056 }
2057
2058 emitMemCmpResultBlock(IsLittleEndian);
2059 return PhiRes;
2060}
2061
2062// This function expands the memcmp call into an inline expansion and returns
2063// the memcmp result.
2064Value *MemCmpExpansion::getMemCmpExpansion(bool IsLittleEndian) {
2065
2066 ConstantInt *SizeCast = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CI->getArgOperand(2));
2067 uint64_t Size = SizeCast->getZExtValue();
2068
2069 int LoadSize = MaxLoadSize;
2070 int NumBytesToBeProcessed = Size;
2071
2072 if (IsUsedForZeroCmp) {
2073 return getMemCmpExpansionZeroCase(Size, IsLittleEndian);
2074 }
2075
2076 unsigned Index = 0;
2077 // This loop calls emitLoadCompareBlock for comparing SizeVal bytes of the two
2078 // memcmp source. It starts with loading using the maximum load size set by
2079 // the target. It processes any remaining bytes using a load size which is the
2080 // next smallest power of 2.
2081 while (NumBytesToBeProcessed) {
2082 // Calculate how many blocks we can create with the current load size
2083 int NumBlocks = NumBytesToBeProcessed / LoadSize;
2084 int GEPIndex = (Size - NumBytesToBeProcessed) / LoadSize;
2085 NumBytesToBeProcessed = NumBytesToBeProcessed % LoadSize;
2086
2087 // For each NumBlocks, populate the instruction sequence for loading and
2088 // comparing LoadSize bytes
2089 while (NumBlocks--) {
2090 emitLoadCompareBlock(Index, LoadSize, GEPIndex, IsLittleEndian);
2091 Index++;
2092 GEPIndex++;
2093 }
2094 // Get the next LoadSize to use
2095 LoadSize = LoadSize / 2;
2096 }
2097
2098 emitMemCmpResultBlock(IsLittleEndian);
2099 return PhiRes;
2100}
2101
2102// This function checks to see if an expansion of memcmp can be generated.
2103// It checks for constant compare size that is less than the max inline size.
2104// If an expansion cannot occur, returns false to leave as a library call.
2105// Otherwise, the library call is replaced wtih new IR instruction sequence.
2106/// We want to transform:
2107/// %call = call signext i32 @memcmp(i8* %0, i8* %1, i64 15)
2108/// To:
2109/// loadbb:
2110/// %0 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2111/// %1 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2112/// %2 = bitcast i8* %1 to i64*
2113/// %3 = bitcast i8* %0 to i64*
2114/// %4 = load i64, i64* %2
2115/// %5 = load i64, i64* %3
2116/// %6 = call i64 @llvm.bswap.i64(i64 %4)
2117/// %7 = call i64 @llvm.bswap.i64(i64 %5)
2118/// %8 = sub i64 %6, %7
2119/// %9 = icmp ne i64 %8, 0
2120/// br i1 %9, label %res_block, label %loadbb1
2121/// res_block: ; preds = %loadbb2,
2122/// %loadbb1, %loadbb
2123/// %phi.src1 = phi i64 [ %6, %loadbb ], [ %22, %loadbb1 ], [ %36, %loadbb2 ]
2124/// %phi.src2 = phi i64 [ %7, %loadbb ], [ %23, %loadbb1 ], [ %37, %loadbb2 ]
2125/// %10 = icmp ult i64 %phi.src1, %phi.src2
2126/// %11 = select i1 %10, i32 -1, i32 1
2127/// br label %endblock
2128/// loadbb1: ; preds = %loadbb
2129/// %12 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2130/// %13 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2131/// %14 = bitcast i8* %13 to i32*
2132/// %15 = bitcast i8* %12 to i32*
2133/// %16 = getelementptr i32, i32* %14, i32 2
2134/// %17 = getelementptr i32, i32* %15, i32 2
2135/// %18 = load i32, i32* %16
2136/// %19 = load i32, i32* %17
2137/// %20 = call i32 @llvm.bswap.i32(i32 %18)
2138/// %21 = call i32 @llvm.bswap.i32(i32 %19)
2139/// %22 = zext i32 %20 to i64
2140/// %23 = zext i32 %21 to i64
2141/// %24 = sub i64 %22, %23
2142/// %25 = icmp ne i64 %24, 0
2143/// br i1 %25, label %res_block, label %loadbb2
2144/// loadbb2: ; preds = %loadbb1
2145/// %26 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2146/// %27 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2147/// %28 = bitcast i8* %27 to i16*
2148/// %29 = bitcast i8* %26 to i16*
2149/// %30 = getelementptr i16, i16* %28, i16 6
2150/// %31 = getelementptr i16, i16* %29, i16 6
2151/// %32 = load i16, i16* %30
2152/// %33 = load i16, i16* %31
2153/// %34 = call i16 @llvm.bswap.i16(i16 %32)
2154/// %35 = call i16 @llvm.bswap.i16(i16 %33)
2155/// %36 = zext i16 %34 to i64
2156/// %37 = zext i16 %35 to i64
2157/// %38 = sub i64 %36, %37
2158/// %39 = icmp ne i64 %38, 0
2159/// br i1 %39, label %res_block, label %loadbb3
2160/// loadbb3: ; preds = %loadbb2
2161/// %40 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2162/// %41 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2163/// %42 = getelementptr i8, i8* %41, i8 14
2164/// %43 = getelementptr i8, i8* %40, i8 14
2165/// %44 = load i8, i8* %42
2166/// %45 = load i8, i8* %43
2167/// %46 = zext i8 %44 to i32
2168/// %47 = zext i8 %45 to i32
2169/// %48 = sub i32 %46, %47
2170/// br label %endblock
2171/// endblock: ; preds = %res_block,
2172/// %loadbb3
2173/// %phi.res = phi i32 [ %48, %loadbb3 ], [ %11, %res_block ]
2174/// ret i32 %phi.res
2175static bool expandMemCmp(CallInst *CI, const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
2176 const TargetLowering *TLI, const DataLayout *DL) {
2177 NumMemCmpCalls++;
2178 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
2179
2180 // TTI call to check if target would like to expand memcmp and get the
2181 // MaxLoadSize
2182 unsigned MaxLoadSize;
2183 if (!TTI->expandMemCmp(CI, MaxLoadSize))
2184 return false;
2185
2186 // Early exit from expansion if -Oz
2187 if (CI->getParent()->getParent()->optForMinSize()) {
2188 return false;
2189 }
2190
2191 // Early exit from expansion if size is not a constant
2192 ConstantInt *SizeCast = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CI->getArgOperand(2));
2193 if (!SizeCast) {
2194 NumMemCmpNotConstant++;
2195 return false;
2196 }
2197
2198 // Early exit from expansion if size greater than max bytes to load
2199 uint64_t SizeVal = SizeCast->getZExtValue();
2200
2201 unsigned NumLoads = 0;
2202 unsigned RemainingSize = SizeVal;
2203 unsigned LoadSize = MaxLoadSize;
2204 while (RemainingSize) {
2205 NumLoads += RemainingSize / LoadSize;
2206 RemainingSize = RemainingSize % LoadSize;
2207 LoadSize = LoadSize / 2;
2208 }
2209
2210 if (NumLoads >
2211 TLI->getMaxExpandSizeMemcmp(CI->getParent()->getParent()->optForSize())) {
2212 NumMemCmpGreaterThanMax++;
2213 return false;
2214 }
2215
2216 NumMemCmpInlined++;
2217
2218 // MemCmpHelper object, creates and sets up basic blocks required for
2219 // expanding memcmp with size SizeVal
2220 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock = MemCmpNumLoadsPerBlock;
2221 MemCmpExpansion MemCmpHelper(CI, MaxLoadSize, NumLoadsPerBlock);
2222
2223 Value *Res = MemCmpHelper.getMemCmpExpansion(DL->isLittleEndian());
2224
2225 // Replace call with result of expansion and erarse call.
2226 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Res);
2227 CI->eraseFromParent();
2228
2229 return true;
2230}
2231
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002232bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00002233 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00002234
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00002235 // Lower inline assembly if we can.
2236 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to
2237 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now.
2238 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) {
2239 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) {
2240 // Avoid invalidating the iterator.
2241 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
2242 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause
2243 // reuse before a value is defined.
2244 SunkAddrs.clear();
2245 return true;
2246 }
2247 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002248 if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI))
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00002249 return true;
2250 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00002251
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002252 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good
2253 // idea
2254 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002255 if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) {
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002256 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
2257 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and
2258 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes
2259 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and
2260 // if size - offset meets the size threshold.
2261 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
2262 continue;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002263 APInt Offset(DL->getPointerSizeInBits(
2264 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()),
2265 0);
2266 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002267 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue();
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00002268 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0)
2269 continue;
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002270 AllocaInst *AI;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002271 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
2272 DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2)
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002273 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00002274 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this
2275 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and
2276 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is
2277 // forbidden.
2278 GlobalVariable *GV;
James Y Knightac03dca2016-01-15 16:33:06 +00002279 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->canIncreaseAlignment() &&
Tim Northover918f0502016-07-18 18:28:52 +00002280 GV->getPointerAlignment(*DL) < PrefAlign &&
Manuel Jacob5f6eaac2016-01-16 20:30:46 +00002281 DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getValueType()) >=
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002282 MinSize + Offset2)
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00002283 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002284 }
2285 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the
2286 // alignment
2287 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002288 unsigned Align = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002289 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI))
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002290 Align = std::min(Align, getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL));
Pete Cooper67cf9a72015-11-19 05:56:52 +00002291 if (Align > MI->getAlignment())
2292 MI->setAlignment(ConstantInt::get(MI->getAlignmentType(), Align));
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002293 }
2294 }
2295
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00002296 // If we have a cold call site, try to sink addressing computation into the
2297 // cold block. This interacts with our handling for loads and stores to
2298 // ensure that we can fold all uses of a potential addressing computation
2299 // into their uses. TODO: generalize this to work over profiling data
2300 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold))
2301 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
2302 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
2303 continue;
2304 unsigned AS = Arg->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2305 return optimizeMemoryInst(CI, Arg, Arg->getType(), AS);
2306 }
Junmo Park6098cbb2016-03-11 07:05:32 +00002307
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002308 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002309 if (II) {
2310 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
2311 default: break;
2312 case Intrinsic::objectsize: {
2313 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.*
George Burgess IV3f089142016-12-20 23:46:36 +00002314 ConstantInt *RetVal =
2315 lowerObjectSizeCall(II, *DL, TLInfo, /*MustSucceed=*/true);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002316 // Substituting this can cause recursive simplifications, which can
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00002317 // invalidate our iterator. Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case
2318 // this
Sanjoy Das2cbeb002017-04-26 16:37:05 +00002319 // happens.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00002320 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator;
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00002321 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00002322
Sanjay Patel545a4562016-01-20 18:59:16 +00002323 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr);
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00002324
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002325 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
2326 // start of the block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00002327 if (IterHandle != CurValue) {
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002328 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
2329 SunkAddrs.clear();
2330 }
2331 return true;
Chris Lattner86d56c62011-01-18 20:53:04 +00002332 }
Ahmed Bougacha236f9042015-05-22 21:37:17 +00002333 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr:
2334 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: {
2335 ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0));
2336 if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() ||
2337 ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent())
2338 return false;
2339 // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it.
2340 ExtVal->moveBefore(CI);
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002341 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
2342 // optimizations don't touch it.
2343 InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal);
Ahmed Bougacha236f9042015-05-22 21:37:17 +00002344 return true;
2345 }
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00002346 case Intrinsic::invariant_group_barrier:
2347 II->replaceAllUsesWith(II->getArgOperand(0));
2348 II->eraseFromParent();
2349 return true;
Sanjay Patel4699b8a2015-11-19 16:37:10 +00002350
2351 case Intrinsic::cttz:
2352 case Intrinsic::ctlz:
2353 // If counting zeros is expensive, try to avoid it.
2354 return despeculateCountZeros(II, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002355 }
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002356
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002357 if (TLI) {
2358 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps;
2359 Type *AccessTy;
Matt Arsenault1672b1b2017-02-08 07:09:03 +00002360 if (TLI->getAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy))
2361 while (!PtrOps.empty()) {
2362 Value *PtrVal = PtrOps.pop_back_val();
2363 unsigned AS = PtrVal->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2364 if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrVal, AccessTy, AS))
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002365 return true;
Matt Arsenault1672b1b2017-02-08 07:09:03 +00002366 }
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002367 }
Pete Cooper615fd892012-03-13 20:59:56 +00002368 }
2369
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002370 // From here on out we're working with named functions.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002371 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false;
Devang Patel0da52502011-05-26 21:51:06 +00002372
Benjamin Kramer7b88a492010-03-12 09:27:41 +00002373 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar
2374 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00002375 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default
2376 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002377 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true);
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00002378 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) {
2379 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2380 CI->eraseFromParent();
2381 return true;
2382 }
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002383
2384 LibFunc Func;
2385 if (TLInfo->getLibFunc(*CI->getCalledFunction(), Func) &&
2386 Func == LibFunc_memcmp) {
2387 if (expandMemCmp(CI, TTI, TLI, DL)) {
2388 ModifiedDT = true;
2389 return true;
2390 }
2391 }
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00002392 return false;
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002393}
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00002394
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002395/// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor
2396/// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is:
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002397/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002398/// bb0:
2399/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
2400/// br label %return
2401/// bb1:
2402/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
2403/// br label %return
2404/// bb2:
2405/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
2406/// br label %return
2407/// return:
2408/// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ]
2409/// ret i32 %retval
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002410/// @endcode
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002411///
2412/// =>
2413///
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002414/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002415/// bb0:
2416/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
2417/// ret i32 %tmp0
2418/// bb1:
2419/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
2420/// ret i32 %tmp1
2421/// bb2:
2422/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
2423/// ret i32 %tmp2
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002424/// @endcode
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002425bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) {
Cameron Zwarich47e71752011-03-24 04:51:51 +00002426 if (!TLI)
2427 return false;
2428
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002429 ReturnInst *RetI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator());
2430 if (!RetI)
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00002431 return false;
2432
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002433 PHINode *PN = nullptr;
2434 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr;
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002435 Value *V = RetI->getReturnValue();
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00002436 if (V) {
2437 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V);
2438 if (BCI)
2439 V = BCI->getOperand(0);
2440
2441 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V);
2442 if (!PN)
2443 return false;
2444 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002445
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002446 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB)
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002447 return false;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002448
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002449 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the
2450 // return is the first instruction in the block.
2451 if (PN) {
2452 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
2453 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI));
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00002454 if (&*BI == BCI)
2455 // Also skip over the bitcast.
2456 ++BI;
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002457 if (&*BI != RetI)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002458 return false;
2459 } else {
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00002460 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
2461 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI;
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002462 if (&*BI != RetI)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002463 return false;
2464 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002465
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002466 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail
2467 /// call.
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +00002468 const Function *F = BB->getParent();
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002469 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls;
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002470 if (PN) {
2471 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
2472 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I));
2473 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call.
2474 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) &&
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +00002475 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) &&
2476 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI))
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002477 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
2478 }
2479 } else {
2480 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002481 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) {
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00002482 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002483 continue;
2484
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002485 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList();
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002486 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin();
2487 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend();
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00002488 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI));
2489 if (RI == RE)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002490 continue;
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00002491
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002492 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI);
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +00002493 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) &&
2494 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI))
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002495 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
2496 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002497 }
2498
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002499 bool Changed = false;
2500 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) {
2501 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i];
2502 CallSite CS(CI);
2503
2504 // Conservatively require the attributes of the call to match those of the
2505 // return. Ignore noalias because it doesn't affect the call sequence.
Reid Klecknerb5180542017-03-21 16:57:19 +00002506 AttributeList CalleeAttrs = CS.getAttributes();
2507 if (AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeList::ReturnIndex)
2508 .removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias) !=
2509 AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeList::ReturnIndex)
2510 .removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002511 continue;
2512
2513 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to
2514 // the return block.
2515 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent();
2516 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator());
2517 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
2518 continue;
2519
2520 // Duplicate the return into CallBB.
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002521 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RetI, BB, CallBB);
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +00002522 ModifiedDT = Changed = true;
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002523 ++NumRetsDup;
2524 }
2525
2526 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +00002527 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002528 BB->eraseFromParent();
2529
2530 return Changed;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002531}
2532
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00002533//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00002534// Memory Optimization
2535//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2536
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002537namespace {
2538
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002539/// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002540/// which holds actual Value*'s for register values.
Chandler Carruth95f83e02013-01-07 15:14:13 +00002541struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002542 Value *BaseReg;
2543 Value *ScaledReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002544 ExtAddrMode() : BaseReg(nullptr), ScaledReg(nullptr) {}
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002545 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
2546 void dump() const;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002547
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002548 bool operator==(const ExtAddrMode& O) const {
2549 return (BaseReg == O.BaseReg) && (ScaledReg == O.ScaledReg) &&
2550 (BaseGV == O.BaseGV) && (BaseOffs == O.BaseOffs) &&
2551 (HasBaseReg == O.HasBaseReg) && (Scale == O.Scale);
2552 }
2553};
2554
Eli Friedmanc1f1f852013-09-10 23:09:24 +00002555#ifndef NDEBUG
2556static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) {
2557 AM.print(OS);
2558 return OS;
2559}
2560#endif
2561
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002562void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
2563 bool NeedPlus = false;
2564 OS << "[";
2565 if (BaseGV) {
2566 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2567 << "GV:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00002568 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002569 NeedPlus = true;
2570 }
2571
Richard Trieuc0f91212014-05-30 03:15:17 +00002572 if (BaseOffs) {
2573 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2574 << BaseOffs;
2575 NeedPlus = true;
2576 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002577
2578 if (BaseReg) {
2579 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2580 << "Base:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00002581 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002582 NeedPlus = true;
2583 }
2584 if (Scale) {
2585 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2586 << Scale << "*";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00002587 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002588 }
2589
2590 OS << ']';
2591}
2592
2593#if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP)
Yaron Kereneb2a2542016-01-29 20:50:44 +00002594LLVM_DUMP_METHOD void ExtAddrMode::dump() const {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002595 print(dbgs());
2596 dbgs() << '\n';
2597}
2598#endif
2599
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002600/// \brief This class provides transaction based operation on the IR.
2601/// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and
2602/// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called.
2603class TypePromotionTransaction {
2604
2605 /// \brief This represents the common interface of the individual transaction.
2606 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on
2607 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction.
2608 class TypePromotionAction {
2609 protected:
2610 /// The Instruction modified.
2611 Instruction *Inst;
2612
2613 public:
2614 /// \brief Constructor of the action.
2615 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR.
2616 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {}
2617
2618 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() {}
2619
2620 /// \brief Undo the modification done by this action.
2621 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was
2622 /// before this action was applied.
2623 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same
2624 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied.
2625 virtual void undo() = 0;
2626
2627 /// \brief Advocate every change made by this action.
2628 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important
2629 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever.
2630 virtual void commit() {
2631 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything.
2632 }
2633 };
2634
2635 /// \brief Utility to remember the position of an instruction.
2636 class InsertionHandler {
2637 /// Position of an instruction.
2638 /// Either an instruction:
2639 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used.
2640 /// - Has a previous instructon: PrevInst is used.
2641 union {
2642 Instruction *PrevInst;
2643 BasicBlock *BB;
2644 } Point;
2645 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction.
2646 bool HasPrevInstruction;
2647
2648 public:
2649 /// \brief Record the position of \p Inst.
2650 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00002651 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst->getIterator();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002652 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin()));
2653 if (HasPrevInstruction)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00002654 Point.PrevInst = &*--It;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002655 else
2656 Point.BB = Inst->getParent();
2657 }
2658
2659 /// \brief Insert \p Inst at the recorded position.
2660 void insert(Instruction *Inst) {
2661 if (HasPrevInstruction) {
2662 if (Inst->getParent())
2663 Inst->removeFromParent();
2664 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst);
2665 } else {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00002666 Instruction *Position = &*Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002667 if (Inst->getParent())
2668 Inst->moveBefore(Position);
2669 else
2670 Inst->insertBefore(Position);
2671 }
2672 }
2673 };
2674
2675 /// \brief Move an instruction before another.
2676 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction {
2677 /// Original position of the instruction.
2678 InsertionHandler Position;
2679
2680 public:
2681 /// \brief Move \p Inst before \p Before.
2682 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before)
2683 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) {
2684 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before << "\n");
2685 Inst->moveBefore(Before);
2686 }
2687
2688 /// \brief Move the instruction back to its original position.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002689 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002690 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n");
2691 Position.insert(Inst);
2692 }
2693 };
2694
2695 /// \brief Set the operand of an instruction with a new value.
2696 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction {
2697 /// Original operand of the instruction.
2698 Value *Origin;
2699 /// Index of the modified instruction.
2700 unsigned Idx;
2701
2702 public:
2703 /// \brief Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal.
2704 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal)
2705 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) {
2706 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n"
2707 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n"
2708 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n");
2709 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx);
2710 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal);
2711 }
2712
2713 /// \brief Restore the original value of the instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002714 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002715 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n"
2716 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n"
2717 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n");
2718 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin);
2719 }
2720 };
2721
2722 /// \brief Hide the operands of an instruction.
2723 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands.
2724 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction {
2725 /// The list of original operands.
2726 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues;
2727
2728 public:
2729 /// \brief Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst.
2730 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
2731 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
2732 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands();
2733 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds);
2734 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) {
2735 // Save the current operand.
2736 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It);
2737 OriginalValues.push_back(Val);
2738 // Set a dummy one.
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00002739 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would imply an overhead
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002740 // that we are not willing to pay.
2741 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType()));
2742 }
2743 }
2744
2745 /// \brief Restore the original list of uses.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002746 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002747 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
2748 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It)
2749 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]);
2750 }
2751 };
2752
2753 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction.
2754 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002755 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002756 public:
2757 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2758 /// result.
2759 /// trunc Opnd to Ty.
2760 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) {
2761 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002762 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2763 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002764 }
2765
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002766 /// \brief Get the built value.
2767 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002768
2769 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002770 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002771 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2772 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2773 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002774 }
2775 };
2776
2777 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction.
2778 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002779 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002780 public:
2781 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2782 /// result.
2783 /// sext Opnd to Ty.
2784 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002785 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002786 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002787 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2788 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002789 }
2790
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002791 /// \brief Get the built value.
2792 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002793
2794 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002795 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002796 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2797 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2798 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002799 }
2800 };
2801
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002802 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction.
2803 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002804 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002805 public:
2806 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2807 /// result.
2808 /// zext Opnd to Ty.
2809 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002810 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002811 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002812 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2813 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002814 }
2815
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002816 /// \brief Get the built value.
2817 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002818
2819 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
2820 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002821 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2822 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2823 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002824 }
2825 };
2826
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002827 /// \brief Mutate an instruction to another type.
2828 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction {
2829 /// Record the original type.
2830 Type *OrigTy;
2831
2832 public:
2833 /// \brief Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy.
2834 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy)
2835 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) {
2836 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy
2837 << "\n");
2838 Inst->mutateType(NewTy);
2839 }
2840
2841 /// \brief Mutate the instruction back to its original type.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002842 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002843 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy
2844 << "\n");
2845 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy);
2846 }
2847 };
2848
2849 /// \brief Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction.
2850 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction {
2851 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses.
2852 struct InstructionAndIdx {
2853 /// The instruction using the instruction.
2854 Instruction *Inst;
2855 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst.
2856 unsigned Idx;
2857 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx)
2858 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {}
2859 };
2860
2861 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index).
2862 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses;
2863 typedef SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator use_iterator;
2864
2865 public:
2866 /// \brief Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New.
2867 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
2868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New
2869 << "\n");
2870 // Record the original uses.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002871 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) {
2872 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
2873 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002874 }
2875 // Now, we can replace the uses.
2876 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New);
2877 }
2878
2879 /// \brief Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002880 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002881 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n");
2882 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(),
2883 EndIt = OriginalUses.end();
2884 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) {
2885 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst);
2886 }
2887 }
2888 };
2889
2890 /// \brief Remove an instruction from the IR.
2891 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction {
2892 /// Original position of the instruction.
2893 InsertionHandler Inserter;
2894 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other
2895 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed.
2896 OperandsHider Hider;
2897 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any.
2898 UsesReplacer *Replacer;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002899 /// Keep track of instructions removed.
2900 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002901
2902 public:
2903 /// \brief Remove all reference of \p Inst and optinally replace all its
2904 /// uses with New.
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002905 /// \p RemovedInsts Keep track of the instructions removed by this Action.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002906 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002907 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts,
2908 Value *New = nullptr)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002909 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst),
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002910 Replacer(nullptr), RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002911 if (New)
2912 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New);
2913 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002914 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst);
2915 /// The instructions removed here will be freed after completing
2916 /// optimizeBlock() for all blocks as we need to keep track of the
2917 /// removed instructions during promotion.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002918 Inst->removeFromParent();
2919 }
2920
Alexander Kornienkof817c1c2015-04-11 02:11:45 +00002921 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002922
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002923 /// \brief Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if
2924 /// new value was provided when build this action.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002925 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002926 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
2927 Inserter.insert(Inst);
2928 if (Replacer)
2929 Replacer->undo();
2930 Hider.undo();
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002931 RemovedInsts.erase(Inst);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002932 }
2933 };
2934
2935public:
2936 /// Restoration point.
2937 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator
2938 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer.
2939 typedef const TypePromotionAction *ConstRestorationPt;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002940
2941 TypePromotionTransaction(SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts)
2942 : RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {}
2943
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002944 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction.
2945 void commit();
2946 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point.
2947 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point);
2948 /// Get the current restoration point.
2949 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const;
2950
2951 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback.
2952 /// @{
2953 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand.
2954 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal);
2955 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002956 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002957 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith.
2958 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New);
2959 /// Same as Value::mutateType.
2960 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy);
2961 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002962 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002963 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002964 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002965 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002966 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002967 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore.
2968 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before);
2969 /// @}
2970
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002971private:
2972 /// The ordered list of actions made so far.
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002973 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions;
2974 typedef SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator CommitPt;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002975 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002976};
2977
2978void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx,
2979 Value *NewVal) {
2980 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002981 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>(Inst, Idx, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002982}
2983
2984void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst,
2985 Value *NewVal) {
2986 Actions.push_back(
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002987 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>(Inst,
2988 RemovedInsts, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002989}
2990
2991void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst,
2992 Value *New) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002993 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002994}
2995
2996void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002997 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002998}
2999
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003000Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd,
3001 Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003002 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003003 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003004 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003005 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003006}
3007
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003008Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst,
3009 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003010 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003011 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003012 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003013 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003014}
3015
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003016Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst,
3017 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003018 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003019 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003020 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003021 return Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003022}
3023
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003024void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst,
3025 Instruction *Before) {
3026 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003027 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>(Inst, Before));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003028}
3029
3030TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt
3031TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003032 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003033}
3034
3035void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() {
3036 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt;
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003037 ++It)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003038 (*It)->commit();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003039 Actions.clear();
3040}
3041
3042void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback(
3043 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003044 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) {
3045 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003046 Curr->undo();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003047 }
3048}
3049
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003050/// \brief A helper class for matching addressing modes.
3051///
3052/// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes.
3053class AddressingModeMatcher {
3054 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts;
3055 const TargetLowering &TLI;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003056 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003057 const DataLayout &DL;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003058
3059 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and
3060 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for.
3061 Type *AccessTy;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003062 unsigned AddrSpace;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003063 Instruction *MemoryInst;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003064
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003065 /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003066 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff.
3067 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003068
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003069 /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations.
3070 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003071 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion.
3072 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts;
3073 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
3074 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT;
3075
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003076 /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks.
3077 /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003078 bool IgnoreProfitability;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003079
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00003080 AddressingModeMatcher(SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003081 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3082 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI,
3083 Type *AT, unsigned AS,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003084 Instruction *MI, ExtAddrMode &AM,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003085 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003086 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3087 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT)
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003088 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TLI(TLI), TRI(TRI),
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003089 DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS),
3090 MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts),
3091 PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003092 IgnoreProfitability = false;
3093 }
3094public:
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003095
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003096 /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003097 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved
3098 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003099 /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003100 /// optimizations.
3101 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
3102 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003103 static ExtAddrMode Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003104 Instruction *MemoryInst,
3105 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003106 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3107 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003108 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003109 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3110 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003111 ExtAddrMode Result;
3112
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003113 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI,
3114 AccessTy, AS,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003115 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003116 PromotedInsts, TPT).matchAddr(V, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003117 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
3118 return Result;
3119 }
3120private:
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003121 bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth);
3122 bool matchAddr(Value *V, unsigned Depth);
3123 bool matchOperationAddr(User *Operation, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth,
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003124 bool *MovedAway = nullptr);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003125 bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003126 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
3127 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003128 bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2);
3129 bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost,
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003130 Value *PromotedOperand) const;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003131};
3132
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003133/// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003134/// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target,
3135/// false if not.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003136bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003137 unsigned Depth) {
3138 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing
3139 // mode. Just process that directly.
3140 if (Scale == 1)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003141 return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003142
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003143 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this.
3144 if (Scale == 0)
3145 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003146
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003147 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we
3148 // need an available scale field.
3149 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg)
3150 return false;
3151
3152 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode;
3153
3154 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like
3155 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8].
3156 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale;
3157 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg;
3158
3159 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out.
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003160 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003161 return false;
3162
3163 // It was legal, so commit it.
3164 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003165
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003166 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now
3167 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding
3168 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003169 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003170 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr.
3171 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) {
3172 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS;
3173 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003174
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003175 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded
3176 // this instruction.
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003177 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003178 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg));
3179 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
3180 return true;
3181 }
3182 }
3183
3184 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have.
3185 return true;
3186}
3187
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003188/// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation
3189/// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it.
3190/// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003191/// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can.
3192static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) {
3193 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
3194 case Instruction::BitCast:
Eli Benderskyf13a0562014-05-22 00:02:52 +00003195 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003196 // Don't touch identity bitcasts.
3197 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType())
3198 return false;
3199 return I->getType()->isPointerTy() || I->getType()->isIntegerTy();
3200 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
3201 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
3202 return true;
3203 case Instruction::IntToPtr:
3204 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable.
3205 return true;
3206 case Instruction::Add:
3207 return true;
3208 case Instruction::Mul:
3209 case Instruction::Shl:
3210 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
3211 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
3212 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
3213 return true;
3214 default:
3215 return false;
3216 }
3217}
3218
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003219/// \brief Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI.
3220/// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion.
3221/// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed
3222/// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003223static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI,
3224 const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003225 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val);
3226 if (!PromotedInst)
3227 return false;
3228 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode());
3229 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion.
3230 if (!ISDOpcode)
3231 return true;
3232 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not.
3233 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003234 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType()));
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003235}
3236
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003237/// \brief Hepler class to perform type promotion.
3238class TypePromotionHelper {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003239 /// \brief Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension
3240 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by
3241 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst.
3242 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003243 /// In other words, check if:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003244 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003245 /// #1 Promotion applies:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003246 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...).
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003247 /// #2 Operand reuses:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003248 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003249 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003250 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType,
3251 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003252
3253 /// \brief Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when
3254 /// promoting \p Inst.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003255 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) {
Rafael Espindola84921b92015-10-24 23:11:13 +00003256 return !(isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003257 }
3258
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003259 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003260 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003261 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003262 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003263 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003264 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
3265 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003266 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003267 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003268 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
3269 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003270 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003271 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003272 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003273
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003274 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003275 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext.
3276 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003277 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003278 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003279 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
3280 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003281 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003282 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003283 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext,
3284 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3285 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3286 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3287 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3288 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
3289 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003290
3291 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003292 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther(
3293 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3294 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3295 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3296 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3297 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
3298 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003299 }
3300
3301 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003302 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther(
3303 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3304 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3305 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3306 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3307 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
3308 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003309 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003310
3311public:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003312 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext.
3313 typedef Value *(*Action)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003314 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3315 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003316 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003317 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
3318 const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003319 /// \brief Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the approriate
3320 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003321 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current
3322 /// sign extension.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003323 /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the
3324 /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003325 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare
3326 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove.
3327 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003328 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003329 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3330 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts);
3331};
3332
3333bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst,
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003334 Type *ConsideredExtType,
3335 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3336 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003337 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet.
3338 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we
3339 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such.
3340 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy())
3341 return false;
3342
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003343 // We can always get through zext.
3344 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst))
3345 return true;
3346
3347 // sext(sext) is ok too.
3348 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003349 return true;
3350
3351 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the
3352 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag.
3353 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst);
3354 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) &&
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003355 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) ||
3356 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap())))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003357 return true;
3358
3359 // Check if we can do the following simplification.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003360 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003361 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst))
3362 return false;
3363
3364 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003365 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension.
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003366 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension, we cannot.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003367 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
3368 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
3369 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth())
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003370 return false;
3371
3372 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have
3373 // any information on the dropped bits.
3374 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic).
3375 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal);
3376 if (!Opnd)
3377 return false;
3378
3379 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003380 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of
3381 // the extension.
3382 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003383 const Type *OpndType;
3384 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd);
Benjamin Kramer4cd5faa2015-07-31 17:00:39 +00003385 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == IsSExt)
3386 OpndType = It->second.getPointer();
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003387 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd)))
3388 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003389 else
3390 return false;
3391
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003392 // #2 check that the truncate just drops extended bits.
Rafael Espindola84921b92015-10-24 23:11:13 +00003393 return Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >=
3394 OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003395}
3396
3397TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003398 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003399 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003400 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) &&
3401 "Unexpected instruction type");
3402 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
3403 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType();
3404 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext);
3405 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003406 // get through.
3407 // If it, check we can get through.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003408 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003409 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003410
3411 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare.
3412 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be
3413 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003414 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003415 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003416
3417 // SExt or Trunc instructions.
3418 // Return the related handler.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003419 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) ||
3420 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003421 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003422
3423 // Regular instruction.
3424 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003425 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType()))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003426 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003427 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003428}
3429
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003430Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003431 llvm::Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003432 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003433 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003434 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003435 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
3436 // get through it and this method should not be called.
3437 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003438 Value *ExtVal = SExt;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003439 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003440 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003441 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003442 // => zext(opnd).
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003443 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003444 Value *ZExt =
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003445 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType());
3446 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt);
3447 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003448 ExtVal = ZExt;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003449 } else {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003450 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd))
3451 // => z|sext(opnd).
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003452 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0));
3453 }
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003454 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003455
3456 // Remove dead code.
3457 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty())
3458 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd);
3459
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00003460 // Check if the extension is still needed.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003461 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003462 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) {
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003463 if (ExtInst) {
3464 if (Exts)
3465 Exts->push_back(ExtInst);
3466 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt;
3467 }
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003468 return ExtVal;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003469 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003470
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00003471 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty.
3472 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst.
3473 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0);
3474 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003475 return NextVal;
3476}
3477
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003478Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther(
3479 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003480 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003481 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003482 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI,
3483 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003484 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003485 // get through it and this method should not be called.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003486 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003487 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003488 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) {
3489 // ExtOpnd will be promoted.
3490 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003491 // promoted version.
3492 // Create the truncate now.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003493 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType());
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003494 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) {
3495 ITrunc->removeFromParent();
3496 // Insert it just after the definition.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003497 ITrunc->insertAfter(ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003498 if (Truncs)
3499 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003500 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003501
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003502 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc);
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003503 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replaced by the previous call
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003504 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003505 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003506 }
3507
3508 // Get through the Instruction:
3509 // 1. Update its type.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003510 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst.
3511 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003512
3513 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion.
3514 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003515 PromotedInsts.insert(std::pair<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>(
3516 ExtOpnd, TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), IsSExt)));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003517 // Step #1.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003518 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType());
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003519 // Step #2.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003520 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003521 // Step #3.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003522 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003523
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003524 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n");
3525 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003526 ++OpIdx) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003527 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n');
3528 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() ||
3529 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003530 DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n");
3531 continue;
3532 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003533 // Check if we can statically extend the operand.
3534 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003535 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003536 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
3537 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
3538 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth)
3539 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth);
3540 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003541 continue;
3542 }
3543 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them.
3544 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003545 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
3546 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003547 continue;
3548 }
3549
3550 // Otherwise we have to explicity sign extend the operand.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003551 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand.
3552 if (!ExtForOpnd) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003553 // If yes, create a new one.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003554 DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n");
Quentin Colombet84f89cc2014-12-22 18:11:52 +00003555 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType())
3556 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType());
3557 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) {
3558 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd);
3559 continue;
3560 }
3561 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003562 }
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003563 if (Exts)
3564 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003565 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003566
3567 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003568 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd);
3569 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003570 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003571 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003572 ExtForOpnd = nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003573 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003574 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) {
3575 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n");
3576 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003577 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003578 return ExtOpnd;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003579}
3580
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003581/// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003582/// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the
3583/// promotion.
3584/// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion
3585/// plus the number of instructions that have been
3586/// matched in the addressing mode the promotion.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003587/// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted.
3588/// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003589bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable(
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003590 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const {
3591 DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost << '\n');
3592 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the
3593 // old extension plus what we folded.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003594 // This is not profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003595 if (NewCost > OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003596 return false;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003597 if (NewCost < OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003598 return true;
3599 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in
3600 // loads for instance.
3601 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003602 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand);
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003603}
3604
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003605/// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003606/// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003607/// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003608/// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or
3609/// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success.
3610/// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing
3611/// because it has been moved away.
3612/// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions.
3613/// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away.
3614/// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must
3615/// not be referenced anymore.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003616bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003617 unsigned Depth,
3618 bool *MovedAway) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003619 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees.
3620 if (Depth >= 5) return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003621
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003622 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place.
3623 if (MovedAway)
3624 *MovedAway = false;
3625
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003626 switch (Opcode) {
3627 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
3628 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003629 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003630 case Instruction::IntToPtr: {
3631 auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3632 auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003633 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003634 if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003635 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003636 return false;
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003637 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003638 case Instruction::BitCast:
3639 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is
3640 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something).
3641 if ((AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isPointerTy() ||
3642 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntegerTy()) &&
3643 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR,
3644 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it
3645 // is doing.
3646 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType())
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003647 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003648 return false;
Matt Arsenaultf05b0232015-05-26 16:59:43 +00003649 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: {
3650 unsigned SrcAS
3651 = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3652 unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3653 if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003654 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Matt Arsenaultf05b0232015-05-26 16:59:43 +00003655 return false;
3656 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003657 case Instruction::Add: {
3658 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win.
3659 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3660 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003661 // Start a transaction at this point.
3662 // The LHS may match but not the RHS.
3663 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially
3664 // matched operation.
3665 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3666 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3667
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003668 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) &&
3669 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003670 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003671
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003672 // Restore the old addr mode info.
3673 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3674 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003675 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003676
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003677 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003678 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) &&
3679 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003680 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003681
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003682 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in.
3683 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3684 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003685 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003686 break;
3687 }
3688 //case Instruction::Or:
3689 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD.
3690 //break;
3691 case Instruction::Mul:
3692 case Instruction::Shl: {
3693 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
3694 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1));
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00003695 if (!RHS)
3696 return false;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003697 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue();
3698 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl)
3699 Scale = 1LL << Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003700
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003701 return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003702 }
3703 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: {
3704 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most
3705 // one variable offset.
3706 int VariableOperand = -1;
3707 unsigned VariableScale = 0;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003708
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003709 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003710 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst);
3711 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) {
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00003712 if (StructType *STy = GTI.getStructTypeOrNull()) {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003713 const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003714 unsigned Idx =
3715 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue();
3716 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx);
3717 } else {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003718 uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003719 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) {
3720 ConstantOffset += CI->getSExtValue()*TypeSize;
3721 } else if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything.
3722 // We only allow one variable index at the moment.
3723 if (VariableOperand != -1)
3724 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003725
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003726 // Remember the variable index.
3727 VariableOperand = i;
3728 VariableScale = TypeSize;
3729 }
3730 }
3731 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003732
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003733 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case,
3734 // just add it to the disp field and check validity.
3735 if (VariableOperand == -1) {
3736 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003737 if (ConstantOffset == 0 ||
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003738 TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003739 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003740 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003741 return true;
3742 }
3743 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset;
3744 return false;
3745 }
3746
3747 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match.
3748 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3749 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3750
3751 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target.
3752 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
3753
3754 // Match the base operand of the GEP.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003755 if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003756 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register.
3757 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
3758 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3759 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3760 return false;
3761 }
3762 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3763 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3764 }
3765
3766 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003767 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003768 Depth)) {
3769 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register
3770 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale.
3771 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3772 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3773 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg)
3774 return false;
3775 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3776 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3777 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003778 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand),
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003779 VariableScale, Depth)) {
3780 // If even that didn't work, bail.
3781 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3782 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3783 return false;
3784 }
3785 }
3786
3787 return true;
3788 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003789 case Instruction::SExt:
3790 case Instruction::ZExt: {
3791 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst);
3792 if (!Ext)
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00003793 return false;
Sanjay Patelab60d042014-07-16 21:08:10 +00003794
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003795 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003796 // Ask for a method for doing so.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003797 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003798 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003799 if (!TPH)
3800 return false;
3801
3802 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3803 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003804 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0;
3805 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003806 Value *PromotedOperand =
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003807 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003808 // SExt has been moved away.
3809 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is
3810 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point.
3811 // E.g.,
3812 // op = add opnd, 1
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003813 // idx = ext op
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003814 // addr = gep base, idx
3815 // is now:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003816 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003817 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls)
3818 // addr = gep base, op <- match
3819 if (MovedAway)
3820 *MovedAway = true;
3821
3822 assert(PromotedOperand &&
3823 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
3824
3825 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3826 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3827
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003828 if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) ||
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003829 // The total of the new cost is equal to the cost of the created
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003830 // instructions.
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003831 // The total of the old cost is equal to the cost of the extension plus
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003832 // what we have saved in the addressing mode.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003833 !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003834 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize),
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003835 PromotedOperand)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003836 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3837 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3838 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n");
3839 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3840 return false;
3841 }
3842 return true;
3843 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003844 }
3845 return false;
3846}
3847
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003848/// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode.
3849/// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode
3850/// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t
3851/// for the target.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003852///
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003853bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003854 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching
3855 // fails.
3856 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3857 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003858 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) {
3859 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target.
3860 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue();
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003861 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003862 return true;
3863 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue();
3864 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) {
3865 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003866 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003867 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV;
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003868 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003869 return true;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003870 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003871 }
3872 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) {
3873 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3874 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3875
3876 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003877 bool MovedAway = false;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003878 if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) {
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003879 // This instruction may have been moved away. If so, there is nothing
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003880 // to check here.
3881 if (MovedAway)
3882 return true;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003883 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually
3884 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing
3885 // register pressure too much.
3886 if (I->hasOneUse() ||
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003887 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003888 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I);
3889 return true;
3890 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003891
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003892 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back.
3893 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I;
3894 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3895 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003896 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003897 }
3898 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) {
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003899 if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003900 return true;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003901 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003902 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) {
3903 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode.
3904 return true;
3905 }
3906
3907 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :)
3908 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
3909 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3910 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr;
3911 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r].
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003912 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003913 return true;
3914 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003915 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003916 }
3917
3918 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r].
3919 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) {
3920 AddrMode.Scale = 1;
3921 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr;
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003922 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003923 return true;
3924 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003925 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003926 }
3927 // Couldn't match.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003928 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003929 return false;
3930}
3931
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003932/// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due
3933/// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003934static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003935 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3936 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) {
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003937 const Function *F = CI->getParent()->getParent();
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00003938 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003939 TLI.ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), &TRI,
Mehdi Amini8ac7a9d2015-07-07 19:07:19 +00003940 ImmutableCallSite(CI));
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003941
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003942 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3943 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003944
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003945 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003946 TLI.ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003947
3948 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory
3949 // operand, we can't fold it!
3950 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal &&
3951 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory ||
3952 !OpInfo.isIndirect))
3953 return false;
3954 }
3955
3956 return true;
3957}
3958
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003959/// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use.
3960/// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003961/// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003962static bool FindAllMemoryUses(
3963 Instruction *I,
3964 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003965 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts,
3966 const TargetLowering &TLI, const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003967 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00003968 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003969 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003970
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003971 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out.
3972 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I))
3973 return true;
3974
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00003975 const bool OptSize = I->getFunction()->optForSize();
3976
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003977 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003978 for (Use &U : I->uses()) {
3979 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003980
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003981 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) {
3982 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo()));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003983 continue;
3984 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003985
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003986 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) {
3987 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
Matt Arsenault02d915b2017-03-15 22:35:20 +00003988 if (opNo != StoreInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
3989 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003990 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo));
3991 continue;
3992 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003993
Matt Arsenault02d915b2017-03-15 22:35:20 +00003994 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(UserI)) {
3995 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
3996 if (opNo != AtomicRMWInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
3997 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
3998 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(RMW, opNo));
3999 continue;
4000 }
4001
4002 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(UserI)) {
4003 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
4004 if (opNo != AtomicCmpXchgInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4005 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
4006 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(CmpX, opNo));
4007 continue;
4008 }
4009
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004010 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) {
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004011 // If this is a cold call, we can sink the addressing calculation into
4012 // the cold path. See optimizeCallInst
4013 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold))
4014 continue;
Junmo Park6098cbb2016-03-11 07:05:32 +00004015
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004016 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue());
4017 if (!IA) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004018
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004019 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out.
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004020 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TLI, TRI))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004021 return true;
4022 continue;
4023 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004024
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004025 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004026 return true;
4027 }
4028
4029 return false;
4030}
4031
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00004032/// Return true if Val is already known to be live at the use site that we're
4033/// folding it into. If so, there is no cost to include it in the addressing
4034/// mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values that we know are live at the
4035/// instruction already.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004036bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004037 Value *KnownLive2) {
4038 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live!
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004039 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004040 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004041
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004042 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live.
4043 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004044
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004045 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is
4046 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is
4047 // live for the whole function.
4048 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val))
4049 if (AI->isStaticAlloca())
4050 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004051
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004052 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's
4053 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we
4054 // can reasonably fold it.
4055 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent());
4056}
4057
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004058/// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified
4059/// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it.
4060/// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses.
4061/// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it
4062/// into the load. For example, consider this code:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004063///
4064/// X = ...
4065/// Y = X+1
4066/// use(Y) -> nonload/store
4067/// Z = Y+1
4068/// load Z
4069///
4070/// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z
4071/// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to
4072/// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one
4073/// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the
4074/// number of computations either.
4075///
4076/// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If
4077/// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to
4078/// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier.
4079bool AddressingModeMatcher::
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004080isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004081 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) {
4082 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004083
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004084 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it,
4085 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get
4086 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those
4087 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this
4088 // address extends the lifetime of.
4089 //
4090 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here,
4091 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any
4092 // folded immediates).
4093 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004094
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004095 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their
4096 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004097 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004098 BaseReg = nullptr;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004099 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004100 ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004101
4102 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live
4103 // ranges, we're ok with it.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004104 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004105 return true;
4106
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004107 // If all uses of this instruction can have the address mode sunk into them,
4108 // we can remove the addressing mode and effectively trade one live register
4109 // for another (at worst.) In this context, folding an addressing mode into
Junmo Park6098cbb2016-03-11 07:05:32 +00004110 // the use is just a particularly nice way of sinking it.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004111 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses;
4112 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004113 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004114 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use!
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004115
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004116 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of
4117 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004118 // into a memory use, loop over each of these memory operation uses and see
4119 // if they could *actually* fold the instruction. The assumption is that
4120 // addressing modes are cheap and that duplicating the computation involved
4121 // many times is worthwhile, even on a fastpath. For sinking candidates
4122 // (i.e. cold call sites), this serves as a way to prevent excessive code
4123 // growth since most architectures have some reasonable small and fast way to
4124 // compute an effective address. (i.e LEA on x86)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004125 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts;
4126 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4127 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first;
4128 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004129
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004130 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't
4131 // know what it accesses.
4132 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004133 PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType());
4134 if (!AddrTy)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004135 return false;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004136 Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType();
4137 unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace();
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004138
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004139 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This
4140 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will
4141 // *actually* cover the shared instruction.
4142 ExtAddrMode Result;
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00004143 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4144 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004145 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher(MatchedAddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI,
4146 AddressAccessTy, AS,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00004147 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004148 PromotedInsts, TPT);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004149 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004150 bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004151 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
4152
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00004153 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not
4154 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped
4155 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state.
4156 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4157
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004158 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it.
David Majnemer0d955d02016-08-11 22:21:41 +00004159 if (!is_contained(MatchedAddrModeInsts, I))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004160 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004161
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004162 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear();
4163 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004164
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004165 return true;
4166}
4167
4168} // end anonymous namespace
4169
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004170/// Return true if the specified values are defined in a
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004171/// different basic block than BB.
4172static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) {
4173 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
4174 return I->getParent() != BB;
4175 return false;
4176}
4177
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004178/// Sink addressing mode computation immediate before MemoryInst if doing so
4179/// can be done without increasing register pressure. The need for the
4180/// register pressure constraint means this can end up being an all or nothing
4181/// decision for all uses of the same addressing computation.
4182///
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004183/// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do
4184/// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try
4185/// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the
4186/// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As
4187/// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible.
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00004188///
4189/// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004190/// operands. It's also used to sink addressing computations feeding into cold
4191/// call sites into their (cold) basic block.
4192///
4193/// The motivation for handling sinking into cold blocks is that doing so can
4194/// both enable other address mode sinking (by satisfying the register pressure
4195/// constraint above), and reduce register pressure globally (by removing the
4196/// addressing mode computation from the fast path entirely.).
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004197bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004198 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004199 Value *Repl = Addr;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004200
4201 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004202 // unprofitable PRE transformations.
Cameron Zwarich43cecb12011-01-03 06:33:01 +00004203 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist;
4204 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004205 worklist.push_back(Addr);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004206
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004207 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI nodes, and ensure that
4208 // the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI roots of the graph
4209 // are equivalent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004210 Value *Consensus = nullptr;
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00004211 unsigned NumUsesConsensus = 0;
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00004212 bool IsNumUsesConsensusValid = false;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004213 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts;
4214 ExtAddrMode AddrMode;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004215 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004216 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4217 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004218 while (!worklist.empty()) {
4219 Value *V = worklist.back();
4220 worklist.pop_back();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004221
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004222 // Break use-def graph loops.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004223 if (!Visited.insert(V).second) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004224 Consensus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004225 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004226 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004227
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004228 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values.
4229 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) {
Pete Cooper833f34d2015-05-12 20:05:31 +00004230 for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values())
4231 worklist.push_back(IncValue);
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004232 continue;
4233 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004234
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004235 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed. Note that
4236 // the result may differ depending on what other uses our candidate
4237 // addressing instructions might have.
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004238 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> NewAddrModeInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004239 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match(
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004240 V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, NewAddrModeInsts, *TLI, *TRI,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00004241 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT);
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00004242
4243 // This check is broken into two cases with very similar code to avoid using
4244 // getNumUses() as much as possible. Some values have a lot of uses, so
4245 // calling getNumUses() unconditionally caused a significant compile-time
4246 // regression.
4247 if (!Consensus) {
4248 Consensus = V;
4249 AddrMode = NewAddrMode;
4250 AddrModeInsts = NewAddrModeInsts;
4251 continue;
4252 } else if (NewAddrMode == AddrMode) {
4253 if (!IsNumUsesConsensusValid) {
4254 NumUsesConsensus = Consensus->getNumUses();
4255 IsNumUsesConsensusValid = true;
4256 }
4257
4258 // Ensure that the obtained addressing mode is equivalent to that obtained
4259 // for all other roots of the PHI traversal. Also, when choosing one
4260 // such root as representative, select the one with the most uses in order
4261 // to keep the cost modeling heuristics in AddressingModeMatcher
4262 // applicable.
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00004263 unsigned NumUses = V->getNumUses();
4264 if (NumUses > NumUsesConsensus) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004265 Consensus = V;
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00004266 NumUsesConsensus = NumUses;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004267 AddrModeInsts = NewAddrModeInsts;
4268 }
4269 continue;
4270 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004271
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004272 Consensus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004273 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004274 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004275
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004276 // If the addressing mode couldn't be determined, or if multiple different
4277 // ones were determined, bail out now.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004278 if (!Consensus) {
4279 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4280 return false;
4281 }
4282 TPT.commit();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004283
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004284 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything.
Justin Lebar838c7f52016-11-21 22:49:11 +00004285 if (none_of(AddrModeInsts, [&](Value *V) {
4286 return IsNonLocalValue(V, MemoryInst->getParent());
4287 })) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00004288 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004289 return false;
4290 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004291
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004292 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is
4293 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are
4294 // guaranteed to happen later.
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004295 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004296
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004297 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know
4298 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already
4299 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse the
4300 // computation.
4301 Value *&SunkAddr = SunkAddrs[Addr];
4302 if (SunkAddr) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00004303 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00004304 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004305 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004306 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
Eric Christopherfccff372015-01-27 01:01:38 +00004307 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs ||
4308 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM &&
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004309 SubtargetInfo->useAA())) {
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004310 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This
4311 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities.
4312 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00004313 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00004314 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004315 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004316
4317 // First, find the pointer.
4318 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4319 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004320 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004321 }
4322
4323 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4324 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a
4325 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless).
4326 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4327 return false;
4328
4329 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4330 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4331 }
4332
4333 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
4334 if (ResultPtr)
4335 return false;
4336
4337 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV;
4338 }
4339
4340 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher
4341 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case,
4342 // use it here.
4343 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4344 ResultPtr =
4345 Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004346 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004347 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) {
4348 ResultPtr =
4349 Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
4350 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4351 }
4352
4353 if (!ResultPtr &&
4354 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4355 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
4356 } else if (!ResultPtr) {
4357 return false;
4358 } else {
4359 Type *I8PtrTy =
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00004360 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace());
4361 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty();
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004362
4363 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
4364 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
4365 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
4366 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
4367 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
4368 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4369 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
4370 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
4371 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
4372
4373 ResultIndex = V;
4374 }
4375
4376 // Add the scale value.
4377 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4378 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4379 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
4380 // done.
4381 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
4382 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
4383 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
4384 } else {
4385 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
4386 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
4387 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
4388 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
4389 // do not match instead of extending it.
4390 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(ResultIndex);
4391 if (I && (ResultIndex != AddrMode.BaseReg))
4392 I->eraseFromParent();
4393 return false;
4394 }
4395
4396 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4397 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
4398 "sunkaddr");
4399 if (ResultIndex)
4400 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr");
4401 else
4402 ResultIndex = V;
4403 }
4404
4405 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
4406 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4407 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
4408 if (ResultIndex) {
NAKAMURA Takumif51a34e2014-10-29 15:23:11 +00004409 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with
4410 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging.
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004411 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004412 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00004413 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004414 }
4415
4416 ResultIndex = V;
4417 }
4418
4419 if (!ResultIndex) {
4420 SunkAddr = ResultPtr;
4421 } else {
4422 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004423 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00004424 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004425 }
4426
4427 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004428 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004429 }
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004430 } else {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00004431 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00004432 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00004433 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004434 Value *Result = nullptr;
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00004435
4436 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
4437 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
4438 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
4439 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
4440 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
4441 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4442 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00004443 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004444 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00004445 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004446 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00004447 Result = V;
4448 }
4449
4450 // Add the scale value.
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004451 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4452 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4453 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
4454 // done.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00004455 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004456 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004457 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
4458 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004459 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004460 } else {
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00004461 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
4462 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
4463 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
4464 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
4465 // do not match instead of extending it.
Joey Gouly12a8bf02014-05-13 15:42:45 +00004466 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result);
Jim Grosbach83b44e12014-04-10 00:27:45 +00004467 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg))
4468 I->eraseFromParent();
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00004469 return false;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004470 }
4471 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004472 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
4473 "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004474 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004475 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004476 else
4477 Result = V;
4478 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004479
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004480 // Add in the BaseGV if present.
4481 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004482 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004483 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004484 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004485 else
4486 Result = V;
4487 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004488
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004489 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
4490 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
Owen Andersonedb4a702009-07-24 23:12:02 +00004491 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004492 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004493 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004494 else
4495 Result = V;
4496 }
4497
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004498 if (!Result)
Owen Anderson5a1acd92009-07-31 20:28:14 +00004499 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004500 else
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004501 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004502 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004503
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004504 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004505
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004506 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions
4507 // using it.
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004508 if (Repl->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004509 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator.
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00004510 // Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this happens.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00004511 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator;
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00004512 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue);
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004513 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004514
Benjamin Kramer8bcc9712012-08-29 15:32:21 +00004515 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo);
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004516
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00004517 if (IterHandle != CurValue) {
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004518 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
4519 // start of the block.
4520 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
4521 SunkAddrs.clear();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004522 }
Dale Johannesenb67a6e662010-03-31 20:37:15 +00004523 }
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00004524 ++NumMemoryInsts;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004525 return true;
4526}
4527
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004528/// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their
4529/// address computing into the block when possible / profitable.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004530bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) {
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004531 bool MadeChange = false;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004532
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00004533 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI =
4534 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getParent()->getParent())->getRegisterInfo();
Mehdi Amini8ac7a9d2015-07-07 19:07:19 +00004535 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
4536 TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00004537 unsigned ArgNo = 0;
John Thompson1094c802010-09-13 18:15:37 +00004538 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4539 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004540
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004541 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Dale Johannesence97d552010-06-25 21:55:36 +00004542 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004543
Eli Friedman666bbe32008-02-26 18:37:49 +00004544 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory &&
4545 OpInfo.isIndirect) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00004546 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004547 MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00004548 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput)
4549 ArgNo++;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004550 }
4551
4552 return MadeChange;
4553}
4554
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004555/// \brief Check if all the uses of \p Val are equivalent (or free) zero or
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004556/// sign extensions.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004557static bool hasSameExtUse(Value *Val, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
4558 assert(!Val->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use");
4559 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Val->user_begin());
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004560 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser);
4561 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType();
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004562 for (const User *U : Val->users()) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004563 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
4564 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI)))
4565 return false;
4566 Type *CurTy = UI->getType();
4567 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE.
4568 if (CurTy == ExtTy)
4569 continue;
4570
4571 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation:
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004572 // a = Val
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004573 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
4574 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3
4575 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into:
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004576 // a = Val
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004577 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
4578 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3
4579 // However, the last sext is not free.
4580 if (IsSExt)
4581 return false;
4582
4583 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another.
4584 // In that case, we would not account for a different use.
4585 Type *NarrowTy;
4586 Type *LargeTy;
4587 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
4588 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) {
4589 NarrowTy = CurTy;
4590 LargeTy = ExtTy;
4591 } else {
4592 NarrowTy = ExtTy;
4593 LargeTy = CurTy;
4594 }
4595
4596 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy))
4597 return false;
4598 }
4599 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free.
4600 return true;
4601}
4602
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004603/// \brief Try to speculatively promote extensions in \p Exts and continue
4604/// promoting through newly promoted operands recursively as far as doing so is
4605/// profitable. Save extensions profitably moved up, in \p ProfitablyMovedExts.
4606/// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to revert
4607/// them.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004608///
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004609/// \return true if some promotion happened, false otherwise.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004610bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToPromoteExts(
4611 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
4612 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts,
4613 unsigned CreatedInstsCost) {
4614 bool Promoted = false;
4615
4616 // Iterate over all the extensions to try to promote them.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004617 for (auto I : Exts) {
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004618 // Early check if we directly have ext(load).
4619 if (isa<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0))) {
4620 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4621 continue;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004622 }
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004623
4624 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion. The reason we have
4625 // this check inside the for loop is to catch the case where an extension
4626 // is directly fed by a load because in such case the extension can be moved
4627 // up without any promotion on its operands.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004628 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion)
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004629 return false;
4630
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004631 // Get the action to perform the promotion.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004632 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
4633 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004634 // Check if we can promote.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004635 if (!TPH) {
4636 // Save the current extension as we cannot move up through its operand.
4637 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004638 continue;
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004639 }
4640
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004641 // Save the current state.
4642 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4643 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
4644 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004645 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0;
4646 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004647 // Promote.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004648 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost,
4649 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004650 assert(PromotedVal &&
4651 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
4652
4653 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load.
4654 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically
4655 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality.
4656 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge
4657 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going,
4658 // because the new extension may be removed too.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004659 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost;
Jun Bum Limb99a06b2017-01-27 17:16:37 +00004660 // FIXME: It would be possible to propagate a negative value instead of
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004661 // conservatively ceiling it to 0.
Jun Bum Limb99a06b2017-01-27 17:16:37 +00004662 TotalCreatedInstsCost =
4663 std::max((long long)0, (TotalCreatedInstsCost - ExtCost));
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004664 if (!StressExtLdPromotion &&
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004665 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 ||
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004666 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) {
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004667 // This promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state, and
4668 // save the current extension in ProfitablyMovedExts as the latest
4669 // speculative promotion turned out to be unprofitable.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004670 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004671 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4672 continue;
4673 }
4674 // Continue promoting NewExts as far as doing so is profitable.
4675 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> NewlyMovedExts;
4676 (void)tryToPromoteExts(TPT, NewExts, NewlyMovedExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost);
4677 bool NewPromoted = false;
4678 for (auto ExtInst : NewlyMovedExts) {
4679 Instruction *MovedExt = cast<Instruction>(ExtInst);
4680 Value *ExtOperand = MovedExt->getOperand(0);
4681 // If we have reached to a load, we need this extra profitability check
4682 // as it could potentially be merged into an ext(load).
4683 if (isa<LoadInst>(ExtOperand) &&
4684 !(StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost ||
4685 (ExtOperand->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(ExtOperand, *TLI))))
4686 continue;
4687
4688 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(MovedExt);
4689 NewPromoted = true;
4690 }
4691
4692 // If none of speculative promotions for NewExts is profitable, rollback
4693 // and save the current extension (I) as the last profitable extension.
4694 if (!NewPromoted) {
4695 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4696 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004697 continue;
4698 }
4699 // The promotion is profitable.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004700 Promoted = true;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004701 }
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004702 return Promoted;
4703}
4704
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004705/// Merging redundant sexts when one is dominating the other.
4706bool CodeGenPrepare::mergeSExts(Function &F) {
4707 DominatorTree DT(F);
4708 bool Changed = false;
4709 for (auto &Entry : ValToSExtendedUses) {
4710 SExts &Insts = Entry.second;
4711 SExts CurPts;
4712 for (Instruction *Inst : Insts) {
4713 if (RemovedInsts.count(Inst) || !isa<SExtInst>(Inst) ||
4714 Inst->getOperand(0) != Entry.first)
4715 continue;
4716 bool inserted = false;
4717 for (auto &Pt : CurPts) {
4718 if (DT.dominates(Inst, Pt)) {
4719 Pt->replaceAllUsesWith(Inst);
4720 RemovedInsts.insert(Pt);
4721 Pt->removeFromParent();
4722 Pt = Inst;
4723 inserted = true;
4724 Changed = true;
4725 break;
4726 }
4727 if (!DT.dominates(Pt, Inst))
4728 // Give up if we need to merge in a common dominator as the
4729 // expermients show it is not profitable.
4730 continue;
4731 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(Pt);
4732 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst);
4733 Inst->removeFromParent();
4734 inserted = true;
4735 Changed = true;
4736 break;
4737 }
4738 if (!inserted)
4739 CurPts.push_back(Inst);
4740 }
4741 }
4742 return Changed;
4743}
4744
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004745/// Return true, if an ext(load) can be formed from an extension in
4746/// \p MovedExts.
4747bool CodeGenPrepare::canFormExtLd(
4748 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, LoadInst *&LI,
4749 Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted) {
4750 for (auto *MovedExtInst : MovedExts) {
4751 if (isa<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0))) {
4752 LI = cast<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0));
4753 Inst = MovedExtInst;
4754 break;
4755 }
4756 }
4757 if (!LI)
4758 return false;
4759
4760 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do.
4761 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote.
4762 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable.
4763 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == Inst->getParent())
4764 return false;
4765
4766 EVT VT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Inst->getType());
4767 EVT LoadVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, LI->getType());
4768
4769 // If the load has other users and the truncate is not free, this probably
4770 // isn't worthwhile.
4771 if (!LI->hasOneUse() && (TLI->isTypeLegal(LoadVT) || !TLI->isTypeLegal(VT)) &&
4772 !TLI->isTruncateFree(Inst->getType(), LI->getType()))
4773 return false;
4774
4775 // Check whether the target supports casts folded into loads.
4776 unsigned LType;
4777 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst))
4778 LType = ISD::ZEXTLOAD;
4779 else {
4780 assert(isa<SExtInst>(Inst) && "Unexpected ext type!");
4781 LType = ISD::SEXTLOAD;
4782 }
4783
4784 return TLI->isLoadExtLegal(LType, VT, LoadVT);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004785}
4786
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004787/// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load,
4788/// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the
4789/// extend into the load.
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004790///
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004791/// E.g.,
4792/// \code
4793/// %ld = load i32* %addr
4794/// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4
4795/// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64
4796// \endcode
4797/// =>
4798/// \code
4799/// %ld = load i32* %addr
4800/// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64
4801/// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4
4802/// \encode
4803/// Note that the promotion in %add to i64 is done in tryToPromoteExts(), which
4804/// allow us to match zext(load i32*) to i64.
4805///
4806/// Also, try to promote the computations used to obtain a sign extended
4807/// value used into memory accesses.
4808/// E.g.,
4809/// \code
4810/// a = add nsw i32 b, 3
4811/// d = sext i32 a to i64
4812/// e = getelementptr ..., i64 d
4813/// \endcode
4814/// =>
4815/// \code
4816/// f = sext i32 b to i64
4817/// a = add nsw i64 f, 3
4818/// e = getelementptr ..., i64 a
4819/// \endcode
4820///
4821/// \p Inst[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some
4822/// promotions apply.
4823bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExt(Instruction *&Inst) {
4824 // ExtLoad formation and address type promotion infrastructure requires TLI to
4825 // be effective.
Chandler Carruth0f139b42016-11-04 06:54:00 +00004826 if (!TLI)
4827 return false;
4828
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004829 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader = false;
4830 /// See if it is an interesting sext operations for the address type
4831 /// promotion before trying to promote it, e.g., the ones with the right
4832 /// type and used in memory accesses.
4833 bool ATPConsiderable = TTI->shouldConsiderAddressTypePromotion(
4834 *Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader);
4835 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004836 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004837 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004838 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004839 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> SpeculativelyMovedExts;
4840 Exts.push_back(Inst);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004841
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004842 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, SpeculativelyMovedExts);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004843
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004844 // Look for a load being extended.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004845 LoadInst *LI = nullptr;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004846 Instruction *ExtFedByLoad;
4847
4848 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form an extended
4849 // load.
4850 if (canFormExtLd(SpeculativelyMovedExts, LI, ExtFedByLoad, HasPromoted)) {
4851 assert(LI && ExtFedByLoad && "Expect a valid load and extension");
4852 TPT.commit();
4853 // Move the extend into the same block as the load
4854 ExtFedByLoad->removeFromParent();
4855 ExtFedByLoad->insertAfter(LI);
4856 // CGP does not check if the zext would be speculatively executed when moved
4857 // to the same basic block as the load. Preserving its original location
4858 // would pessimize the debugging experience, as well as negatively impact
4859 // the quality of sample pgo. We don't want to use "line 0" as that has a
4860 // size cost in the line-table section and logically the zext can be seen as
4861 // part of the load. Therefore we conservatively reuse the same debug
4862 // location for the load and the zext.
4863 ExtFedByLoad->setDebugLoc(LI->getDebugLoc());
4864 ++NumExtsMoved;
4865 Inst = ExtFedByLoad;
4866 return true;
4867 }
4868
4869 // Continue promoting SExts if known as considerable depending on targets.
4870 if (ATPConsiderable &&
4871 performAddressTypePromotion(Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
4872 HasPromoted, TPT, SpeculativelyMovedExts))
4873 return true;
4874
4875 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4876 return false;
4877}
4878
4879// Perform address type promotion if doing so is profitable.
4880// If AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == false, we should find other sext
4881// instructions that sign extended the same initial value. However, if
4882// AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == true, we expect promoting the
4883// extension is just profitable.
4884bool CodeGenPrepare::performAddressTypePromotion(
4885 Instruction *&Inst, bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
4886 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
4887 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
4888 bool Promoted = false;
4889 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 1> UnhandledExts;
4890 bool AllSeenFirst = true;
4891 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
4892 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
4893 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *>::iterator AlreadySeen =
4894 SeenChainsForSExt.find(HeadOfChain);
4895 // If there is an unhandled SExt which has the same header, try to promote
4896 // it as well.
4897 if (AlreadySeen != SeenChainsForSExt.end()) {
4898 if (AlreadySeen->second != nullptr)
4899 UnhandledExts.insert(AlreadySeen->second);
4900 AllSeenFirst = false;
4901 }
4902 }
4903
4904 if (!AllSeenFirst || (AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader &&
4905 SpeculativelyMovedExts.size() == 1)) {
4906 TPT.commit();
4907 if (HasPromoted)
4908 Promoted = true;
4909 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
4910 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
4911 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr;
4912 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I);
4913 }
4914 // Update Inst as promotion happen.
4915 Inst = SpeculativelyMovedExts.pop_back_val();
4916 } else {
4917 // This is the first chain visited from the header, keep the current chain
4918 // as unhandled. Defer to promote this until we encounter another SExt
4919 // chain derived from the same header.
4920 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
4921 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
4922 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = Inst;
4923 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004924 return false;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004925 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004926
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004927 if (!AllSeenFirst && !UnhandledExts.empty())
4928 for (auto VisitedSExt : UnhandledExts) {
4929 if (RemovedInsts.count(VisitedSExt))
4930 continue;
4931 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
4932 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
4933 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Chains;
4934 Exts.push_back(VisitedSExt);
4935 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, Chains);
4936 TPT.commit();
4937 if (HasPromoted)
4938 Promoted = true;
4939 for (auto I : Chains) {
4940 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
4941 // Mark this as handled.
4942 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr;
4943 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I);
4944 }
4945 }
4946 return Promoted;
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004947}
4948
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004949bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) {
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004950 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent();
4951
Bob Wilsonff714f92010-09-21 21:44:14 +00004952 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004953 // other uses of the source with result of extension.
4954 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0);
4955 if (Src->hasOneUse())
4956 return false;
4957
Evan Cheng2011df42007-12-13 07:50:36 +00004958 // Only do this xform if truncating is free.
Gabor Greifaa261722008-02-26 19:13:21 +00004959 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType()))
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00004960 return false;
4961
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00004962 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00004963 // this block.
4964 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent())
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00004965 return false;
4966
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004967 bool DefIsLiveOut = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004968 for (User *U : I->users()) {
4969 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004970
4971 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004972 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004973 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
4974 DefIsLiveOut = true;
4975 break;
4976 }
4977 if (!DefIsLiveOut)
4978 return false;
4979
Jim Grosbach0f38c1e2013-04-15 17:40:48 +00004980 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004981 for (User *U : Src->users()) {
4982 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
4983 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00004984 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
4985 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing
4986 // reloads just before load / store instructions.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004987 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI))
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00004988 return false;
4989 }
4990
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004991 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once.
4992 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs;
4993
4994 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004995 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) {
4996 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00004997
4998 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
4999 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
5000 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5001
5002 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use.
5003 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB];
5004
5005 if (!InsertedTrunc) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00005006 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00005007 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
5008 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", &*InsertPt);
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00005009 InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005010 }
5011
5012 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005013 U = InsertedTrunc;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00005014 ++NumExtUses;
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005015 MadeChange = true;
5016 }
5017
5018 return MadeChange;
5019}
5020
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005021// Find loads whose uses only use some of the loaded value's bits. Add an "and"
5022// just after the load if the target can fold this into one extload instruction,
5023// with the hope of eliminating some of the other later "and" instructions using
5024// the loaded value. "and"s that are made trivially redundant by the insertion
5025// of the new "and" are removed by this function, while others (e.g. those whose
5026// path from the load goes through a phi) are left for isel to potentially
5027// remove.
5028//
5029// For example:
5030//
5031// b0:
5032// x = load i32
5033// ...
5034// b1:
5035// y = and x, 0xff
5036// z = use y
5037//
5038// becomes:
5039//
5040// b0:
5041// x = load i32
5042// x' = and x, 0xff
5043// ...
5044// b1:
5045// z = use x'
5046//
5047// whereas:
5048//
5049// b0:
5050// x1 = load i32
5051// ...
5052// b1:
5053// x2 = load i32
5054// ...
5055// b2:
5056// x = phi x1, x2
5057// y = and x, 0xff
5058//
5059// becomes (after a call to optimizeLoadExt for each load):
5060//
5061// b0:
5062// x1 = load i32
5063// x1' = and x1, 0xff
5064// ...
5065// b1:
5066// x2 = load i32
5067// x2' = and x2, 0xff
5068// ...
5069// b2:
5070// x = phi x1', x2'
5071// y = and x, 0xff
5072//
5073
5074bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load) {
5075
5076 if (!Load->isSimple() ||
5077 !(Load->getType()->isIntegerTy() || Load->getType()->isPointerTy()))
5078 return false;
5079
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00005080 // Skip loads we've already transformed.
5081 if (Load->hasOneUse() &&
5082 InsertedInsts.count(cast<Instruction>(*Load->user_begin())))
5083 return false;
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005084
5085 // Look at all uses of Load, looking through phis, to determine how many bits
5086 // of the loaded value are needed.
5087 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> WorkList;
5088 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> Visited;
5089 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> AndsToMaybeRemove;
5090 for (auto *U : Load->users())
5091 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U));
5092
5093 EVT LoadResultVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Load->getType());
5094 unsigned BitWidth = LoadResultVT.getSizeInBits();
5095 APInt DemandBits(BitWidth, 0);
5096 APInt WidestAndBits(BitWidth, 0);
5097
5098 while (!WorkList.empty()) {
5099 Instruction *I = WorkList.back();
5100 WorkList.pop_back();
5101
5102 // Break use-def graph loops.
5103 if (!Visited.insert(I).second)
5104 continue;
5105
5106 // For a PHI node, push all of its users.
5107 if (auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
5108 for (auto *U : Phi->users())
5109 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U));
5110 continue;
5111 }
5112
5113 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
5114 case llvm::Instruction::And: {
5115 auto *AndC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
5116 if (!AndC)
5117 return false;
5118 APInt AndBits = AndC->getValue();
5119 DemandBits |= AndBits;
5120 // Keep track of the widest and mask we see.
5121 if (AndBits.ugt(WidestAndBits))
5122 WidestAndBits = AndBits;
5123 if (AndBits == WidestAndBits && I->getOperand(0) == Load)
5124 AndsToMaybeRemove.push_back(I);
5125 break;
5126 }
5127
5128 case llvm::Instruction::Shl: {
5129 auto *ShlC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
5130 if (!ShlC)
5131 return false;
5132 uint64_t ShiftAmt = ShlC->getLimitedValue(BitWidth - 1);
Craig Topperfc947bc2017-04-18 17:14:21 +00005133 DemandBits.setLowBits(BitWidth - ShiftAmt);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005134 break;
5135 }
5136
5137 case llvm::Instruction::Trunc: {
5138 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType());
5139 unsigned TruncBitWidth = TruncVT.getSizeInBits();
Craig Topperfc947bc2017-04-18 17:14:21 +00005140 DemandBits.setLowBits(TruncBitWidth);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005141 break;
5142 }
5143
5144 default:
5145 return false;
5146 }
5147 }
5148
5149 uint32_t ActiveBits = DemandBits.getActiveBits();
5150 // Avoid hoisting (and (load x) 1) since it is unlikely to be folded by the
5151 // target even if isLoadExtLegal says an i1 EXTLOAD is valid. For example,
5152 // for the AArch64 target isLoadExtLegal(ZEXTLOAD, i32, i1) returns true, but
5153 // (and (load x) 1) is not matched as a single instruction, rather as a LDR
5154 // followed by an AND.
5155 // TODO: Look into removing this restriction by fixing backends to either
5156 // return false for isLoadExtLegal for i1 or have them select this pattern to
5157 // a single instruction.
5158 //
5159 // Also avoid hoisting if we didn't see any ands with the exact DemandBits
5160 // mask, since these are the only ands that will be removed by isel.
Craig Topperd33ee1b2017-04-03 16:34:59 +00005161 if (ActiveBits <= 1 || !DemandBits.isMask(ActiveBits) ||
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005162 WidestAndBits != DemandBits)
5163 return false;
5164
5165 LLVMContext &Ctx = Load->getType()->getContext();
5166 Type *TruncTy = Type::getIntNTy(Ctx, ActiveBits);
5167 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, TruncTy);
5168
5169 // Reject cases that won't be matched as extloads.
5170 if (!LoadResultVT.bitsGT(TruncVT) || !TruncVT.isRound() ||
5171 !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(ISD::ZEXTLOAD, LoadResultVT, TruncVT))
5172 return false;
5173
5174 IRBuilder<> Builder(Load->getNextNode());
5175 auto *NewAnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(
5176 Builder.CreateAnd(Load, ConstantInt::get(Ctx, DemandBits)));
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00005177 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
5178 // optimizations don't touch it.
5179 InsertedInsts.insert(NewAnd);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005180
5181 // Replace all uses of load with new and (except for the use of load in the
5182 // new and itself).
5183 Load->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd);
5184 NewAnd->setOperand(0, Load);
5185
5186 // Remove any and instructions that are now redundant.
5187 for (auto *And : AndsToMaybeRemove)
5188 // Check that the and mask is the same as the one we decided to put on the
5189 // new and.
5190 if (cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1))->getValue() == DemandBits) {
5191 And->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd);
5192 if (&*CurInstIterator == And)
5193 CurInstIterator = std::next(And->getIterator());
5194 And->eraseFromParent();
5195 ++NumAndUses;
5196 }
5197
5198 ++NumAndsAdded;
5199 return true;
5200}
5201
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005202/// Check if V (an operand of a select instruction) is an expensive instruction
5203/// that is only used once.
5204static bool sinkSelectOperand(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, Value *V) {
5205 auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
5206 // If it's safe to speculatively execute, then it should not have side
5207 // effects; therefore, it's safe to sink and possibly *not* execute.
Rafael Espindola84921b92015-10-24 23:11:13 +00005208 return I && I->hasOneUse() && isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
5209 TTI->getUserCost(I) >= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Expensive;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005210}
5211
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00005212/// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch.
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005213static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005214 const TargetLowering *TLI,
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005215 SelectInst *SI) {
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005216 // If even a predictable select is cheap, then a branch can't be cheaper.
5217 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive())
5218 return false;
5219
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005220 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005221 // whether a select is better represented as a branch.
5222
5223 // If metadata tells us that the select condition is obviously predictable,
5224 // then we want to replace the select with a branch.
5225 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
5226 if (SI->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
5227 uint64_t Max = std::max(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
5228 uint64_t Sum = TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
Sanjay Patelc7b91e62016-05-09 17:31:55 +00005229 if (Sum != 0) {
5230 auto Probability = BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(Max, Sum);
5231 if (Probability > TLI->getPredictableBranchThreshold())
5232 return true;
5233 }
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005234 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005235
5236 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition());
5237
Sanjay Patel4e652762015-09-28 22:14:51 +00005238 // If a branch is predictable, an out-of-order CPU can avoid blocking on its
5239 // comparison condition. If the compare has more than one use, there's
5240 // probably another cmov or setcc around, so it's not worth emitting a branch.
Sanjay Patel5e5f0e92015-09-28 21:44:46 +00005241 if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse())
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005242 return false;
5243
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005244 // If either operand of the select is expensive and only needed on one side
5245 // of the select, we should form a branch.
5246 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue()) ||
5247 sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue()))
5248 return true;
5249
5250 return false;
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005251}
5252
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005253/// If \p isTrue is true, return the true value of \p SI, otherwise return
5254/// false value of \p SI. If the true/false value of \p SI is defined by any
5255/// select instructions in \p Selects, look through the defining select
5256/// instruction until the true/false value is not defined in \p Selects.
5257static Value *getTrueOrFalseValue(
5258 SelectInst *SI, bool isTrue,
5259 const SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> &Selects) {
5260 Value *V;
5261
5262 for (SelectInst *DefSI = SI; DefSI != nullptr && Selects.count(DefSI);
5263 DefSI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) {
Dehao Chenc32d7122016-09-12 20:29:54 +00005264 assert(DefSI->getCondition() == SI->getCondition() &&
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005265 "The condition of DefSI does not match with SI");
5266 V = (isTrue ? DefSI->getTrueValue() : DefSI->getFalseValue());
5267 }
5268 return V;
5269}
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005270
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00005271/// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction,
5272/// turn it into a branch.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005273bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) {
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005274 // Find all consecutive select instructions that share the same condition.
5275 SmallVector<SelectInst *, 2> ASI;
5276 ASI.push_back(SI);
5277 for (BasicBlock::iterator It = ++BasicBlock::iterator(SI);
5278 It != SI->getParent()->end(); ++It) {
5279 SelectInst *I = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(&*It);
5280 if (I && SI->getCondition() == I->getCondition()) {
5281 ASI.push_back(I);
5282 } else {
5283 break;
5284 }
5285 }
5286
5287 SelectInst *LastSI = ASI.back();
5288 // Increment the current iterator to skip all the rest of select instructions
5289 // because they will be either "not lowered" or "all lowered" to branch.
5290 CurInstIterator = std::next(LastSI->getIterator());
5291
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00005292 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1);
5293
5294 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ?
Sanjay Patela31b0c02016-04-26 00:47:39 +00005295 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI || VectorCond ||
5296 SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005297 return false;
5298
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00005299 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind;
5300 if (VectorCond)
5301 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect;
5302 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy())
5303 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal;
5304 else
5305 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect;
5306
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005307 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind) &&
5308 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(TTI, TLI, SI))
5309 return false;
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005310
5311 ModifiedDT = true;
5312
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005313 // Transform a sequence like this:
5314 // start:
5315 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b
5316 // %sel = select i1 %cmp, i32 %c, i32 %d
5317 //
5318 // Into:
5319 // start:
5320 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b
5321 // br i1 %cmp, label %select.true, label %select.false
5322 // select.true:
5323 // br label %select.end
5324 // select.false:
5325 // br label %select.end
5326 // select.end:
5327 // %sel = phi i32 [ %c, %select.true ], [ %d, %select.false ]
5328 //
5329 // In addition, we may sink instructions that produce %c or %d from
5330 // the entry block into the destination(s) of the new branch.
5331 // If the true or false blocks do not contain a sunken instruction, that
5332 // block and its branch may be optimized away. In that case, one side of the
5333 // first branch will point directly to select.end, and the corresponding PHI
5334 // predecessor block will be the start block.
5335
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005336 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks.
5337 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent();
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005338 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(LastSI));
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005339 BasicBlock *EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end");
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005340
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005341 // Delete the unconditional branch that was just created by the split.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005342 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005343
5344 // These are the new basic blocks for the conditional branch.
5345 // At least one will become an actual new basic block.
5346 BasicBlock *TrueBlock = nullptr;
5347 BasicBlock *FalseBlock = nullptr;
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005348 BranchInst *TrueBranch = nullptr;
5349 BranchInst *FalseBranch = nullptr;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005350
5351 // Sink expensive instructions into the conditional blocks to avoid executing
5352 // them speculatively.
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005353 for (SelectInst *SI : ASI) {
5354 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue())) {
5355 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) {
5356 TrueBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.true.sink",
5357 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5358 TrueBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, TrueBlock);
5359 }
5360 auto *TrueInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getTrueValue());
5361 TrueInst->moveBefore(TrueBranch);
5362 }
5363 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) {
5364 if (FalseBlock == nullptr) {
5365 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false.sink",
5366 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5367 FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock);
5368 }
5369 auto *FalseInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getFalseValue());
5370 FalseInst->moveBefore(FalseBranch);
5371 }
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005372 }
5373
5374 // If there was nothing to sink, then arbitrarily choose the 'false' side
5375 // for a new input value to the PHI.
5376 if (TrueBlock == FalseBlock) {
5377 assert(TrueBlock == nullptr &&
5378 "Unexpected basic block transform while optimizing select");
5379
5380 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false",
5381 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5382 BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock);
5383 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005384
5385 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition.
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005386 // If we did not create a new block for one of the 'true' or 'false' paths
5387 // of the condition, it means that side of the branch goes to the end block
5388 // directly and the path originates from the start block from the point of
5389 // view of the new PHI.
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005390 BasicBlock *TT, *FT;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005391 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) {
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005392 TT = EndBlock;
5393 FT = FalseBlock;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005394 TrueBlock = StartBlock;
5395 } else if (FalseBlock == nullptr) {
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005396 TT = TrueBlock;
5397 FT = EndBlock;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005398 FalseBlock = StartBlock;
5399 } else {
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005400 TT = TrueBlock;
5401 FT = FalseBlock;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005402 }
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005403 IRBuilder<>(SI).CreateCondBr(SI->getCondition(), TT, FT, SI);
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005404
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005405 SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> INS;
5406 INS.insert(ASI.begin(), ASI.end());
5407 // Use reverse iterator because later select may use the value of the
5408 // earlier select, and we need to propagate value through earlier select
5409 // to get the PHI operand.
5410 for (auto It = ASI.rbegin(); It != ASI.rend(); ++It) {
5411 SelectInst *SI = *It;
5412 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node.
5413 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", &EndBlock->front());
5414 PN->takeName(SI);
5415 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, true, INS), TrueBlock);
5416 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, false, INS), FalseBlock);
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005417
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005418 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
5419 SI->eraseFromParent();
5420 INS.erase(SI);
5421 ++NumSelectsExpanded;
5422 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005423
5424 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block.
5425 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end();
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005426 return true;
5427}
5428
Benjamin Kramer573ff362014-03-01 17:24:40 +00005429static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005430 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask());
5431 int SplatElem = -1;
5432 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) {
5433 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem)
5434 return false;
5435 SplatElem = Mask[i];
5436 }
5437
5438 return true;
5439}
5440
5441/// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same
5442/// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases
5443/// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that
5444/// codegen can spot all lanes are identical.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005445bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005446 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent();
5447
5448 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive.
5449 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType()))
5450 return false;
5451
5452 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a
5453 // constant splat.
5454 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI))
5455 return false;
5456
5457 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once.
5458 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles;
5459
5460 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005461 for (User *U : SVI->users()) {
5462 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005463
5464 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005465 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005466 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5467
5468 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005469 if (!UI->isShift()) continue;
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005470
5471 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't
5472 // already have a copy.
5473 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB];
5474
5475 if (!InsertedShuffle) {
5476 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00005477 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
5478 InsertedShuffle =
5479 new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0), SVI->getOperand(1),
5480 SVI->getOperand(2), "", &*InsertPt);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005481 }
5482
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005483 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005484 MadeChange = true;
5485 }
5486
5487 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle.
5488 if (SVI->use_empty()) {
5489 SVI->eraseFromParent();
5490 MadeChange = true;
5491 }
5492
5493 return MadeChange;
5494}
5495
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +00005496bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI) {
5497 if (!TLI || !DL)
5498 return false;
5499
5500 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5501 Type *OldType = Cond->getType();
5502 LLVMContext &Context = Cond->getContext();
5503 MVT RegType = TLI->getRegisterType(Context, TLI->getValueType(*DL, OldType));
5504 unsigned RegWidth = RegType.getSizeInBits();
5505
5506 if (RegWidth <= cast<IntegerType>(OldType)->getBitWidth())
5507 return false;
5508
5509 // If the register width is greater than the type width, expand the condition
5510 // of the switch instruction and each case constant to the width of the
5511 // register. By widening the type of the switch condition, subsequent
5512 // comparisons (for case comparisons) will not need to be extended to the
5513 // preferred register width, so we will potentially eliminate N-1 extends,
5514 // where N is the number of cases in the switch.
5515 auto *NewType = Type::getIntNTy(Context, RegWidth);
5516
5517 // Zero-extend the switch condition and case constants unless the switch
5518 // condition is a function argument that is already being sign-extended.
5519 // In that case, we can avoid an unnecessary mask/extension by sign-extending
5520 // everything instead.
5521 Instruction::CastOps ExtType = Instruction::ZExt;
5522 if (auto *Arg = dyn_cast<Argument>(Cond))
5523 if (Arg->hasSExtAttr())
5524 ExtType = Instruction::SExt;
5525
5526 auto *ExtInst = CastInst::Create(ExtType, Cond, NewType);
5527 ExtInst->insertBefore(SI);
5528 SI->setCondition(ExtInst);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005529 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +00005530 APInt NarrowConst = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
5531 APInt WideConst = (ExtType == Instruction::ZExt) ?
5532 NarrowConst.zext(RegWidth) : NarrowConst.sext(RegWidth);
5533 Case.setValue(ConstantInt::get(Context, WideConst));
5534 }
5535
5536 return true;
5537}
5538
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00005539
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005540namespace {
5541/// \brief Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one.
5542/// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition.
5543/// E.g.,
5544/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
5545/// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0
5546/// c = scalar_op b
5547/// store c
5548///
5549/// =>
5550/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
5551/// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane)
5552/// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0
5553/// * store d
5554/// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the
5555/// transition.
5556class VectorPromoteHelper {
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005557 /// DataLayout associated with the current module.
5558 const DataLayout &DL;
5559
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005560 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations.
5561 const TargetLowering &TLI;
5562
5563 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain.
5564 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
5565
5566 /// The transition being moved downwards.
5567 Instruction *Transition;
5568 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted.
5569 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted;
5570 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract.
5571 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost;
5572 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition.
5573 Instruction *CombineInst;
5574
5575 /// \brief The instruction that represents the current end of the transition.
5576 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain
5577 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition.
5578 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const {
5579 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty())
5580 return Transition;
5581 return InstsToBePromoted.back();
5582 }
5583
5584 /// \brief Return the index of the original value in the transition.
5585 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value,
5586 /// c, is at index 0.
5587 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const {
5588 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
5589 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
5590 return 0;
5591 }
5592
5593 /// \brief Return the index of the index in the transition.
5594 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index
5595 /// is at index 1.
5596 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const {
5597 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
5598 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
5599 return 1;
5600 }
5601
5602 /// \brief Get the type of the transition.
5603 /// This is the type of the original value.
5604 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the
5605 /// transition is <2 x i32>.
5606 Type *getTransitionType() const {
5607 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType();
5608 }
5609
5610 /// \brief Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through.
5611 /// I.e., we have the following sequence:
5612 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2>
5613 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ...
5614 /// =>
5615 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ...
5616 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2>
5617 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted);
5618
5619 /// \brief Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the
5620 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted.
5621 bool isProfitableToPromote() {
5622 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
5623 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)
5624 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue()
5625 : -1;
5626 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType();
5627
5628 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst);
5629 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace();
5630 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment();
5631 // Check if this store is supported.
5632 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005633 TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS,
5634 Align)) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005635 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine
5636 // the extract with the store.
5637 return false;
5638 }
5639
5640 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition
5641 // scalar to vector.
5642 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost.
5643 uint64_t ScalarCost =
5644 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index);
5645 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost;
5646 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) {
5647 // Compute the cost.
5648 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones.
5649 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat
5650 // constant.
5651 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0);
5652 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) ||
5653 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0);
5654 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK =
5655 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
5656 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
5657 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK =
5658 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
5659 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
5660 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(
5661 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
5662 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType,
5663 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
5664 }
5665 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: "
5666 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n');
5667 return ScalarCost > VectorCost;
5668 }
5669
5670 /// \brief Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same
5671 /// number of elements as the transition.
5672 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated
Benjamin Kramerdf005cb2015-08-08 18:27:36 +00005673 /// across the whole vector.
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005674 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>,
5675 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible:
5676 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only
5677 /// used at the index of the extract.
5678 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const {
5679 unsigned ExtractIdx = UINT_MAX;
5680 if (!UseSplat) {
5681 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to
5682 // use a splat constant.
5683 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx());
5684 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx))
5685 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue();
5686 else
5687 UseSplat = true;
5688 }
5689
5690 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements();
5691 if (UseSplat)
5692 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val);
5693
5694 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec;
5695 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType());
5696 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) {
5697 if (Idx == ExtractIdx)
5698 ConstVec.push_back(Val);
5699 else
5700 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal);
5701 }
5702 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec);
5703 }
5704
5705 /// \brief Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx
5706 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior.
5707 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use,
5708 unsigned OperandIdx) {
5709 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on
5710 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction.
5711 if (OperandIdx != 1)
5712 return false;
5713 switch (Use->getOpcode()) {
5714 default:
5715 return false;
5716 case Instruction::SDiv:
5717 case Instruction::UDiv:
5718 case Instruction::SRem:
5719 case Instruction::URem:
5720 return true;
5721 case Instruction::FDiv:
5722 case Instruction::FRem:
5723 return !Use->hasNoNaNs();
5724 }
5725 llvm_unreachable(nullptr);
5726 }
5727
5728public:
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005729 VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI,
5730 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition,
5731 unsigned CombineCost)
5732 : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition),
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005733 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost), CombineInst(nullptr) {
5734 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null");
5735 }
5736
5737 /// \brief Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type.
5738 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
5739 // We could support CastInst too.
5740 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted);
5741 }
5742
5743 /// \brief Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted
5744 /// by moving downward the transition through.
5745 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
5746 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded.
5747 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions.
5748 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
5749 const Value *Val = U.get();
5750 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) {
5751 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs,
5752 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a
5753 // division by zero.
5754 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()))
5755 return false;
5756 continue;
5757 }
5758 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) &&
5759 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val))
5760 return false;
5761 }
5762 // Check that the resulting operation is legal.
5763 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode());
5764 if (!ISDOpcode)
5765 return false;
5766 return StressStoreExtract ||
Ahmed Bougacha026600d2014-11-12 23:05:03 +00005767 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005768 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true));
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005769 }
5770
5771 /// \brief Check whether or not \p Use can be combined
5772 /// with the transition.
5773 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse?
5774 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); }
5775
5776 /// \brief Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted.
5777 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
5778 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted);
5779 }
5780
5781 /// \brief Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition.
5782 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) {
5783 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine");
5784 CombineInst = ToBeCombined;
5785 }
5786
5787 /// \brief Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is
5788 /// is profitable.
5789 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise.
5790 bool promote() {
5791 // Check if there is something to promote.
5792 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with,
5793 // we assume the promotion is not profitable.
5794 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst)
5795 return false;
5796
5797 // Check cost.
5798 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote())
5799 return false;
5800
5801 // Promote.
5802 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted)
5803 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted);
5804 InstsToBePromoted.clear();
5805 return true;
5806 }
5807};
5808} // End of anonymous namespace.
5809
5810void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
5811 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def
5812 // can be statically promoted.
5813 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted:
5814 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a
5815 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2
5816 // Move the transition down.
5817 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition.
5818 // = ... b => = ... Def.
5819 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() &&
5820 "The type of the result of the transition does not match "
5821 "the final type");
5822 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition);
5823 // 2. Update the type of the uses.
5824 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def.
5825 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType();
5826 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy);
5827 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted
5828 // operands.
5829 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a.
5830 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
5831 Value *Val = U.get();
5832 Value *NewVal = nullptr;
5833 if (Val == Transition)
5834 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
5835 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) ||
5836 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) {
5837 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef.
5838 NewVal = getConstantVector(
5839 cast<Constant>(Val),
5840 isa<UndefValue>(Val) ||
5841 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()));
5842 } else
Craig Topperd3c02f12015-01-05 10:15:49 +00005843 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update "
5844 "this?");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005845 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal);
5846 }
5847 Transition->removeFromParent();
5848 Transition->insertAfter(ToBePromoted);
5849 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted);
5850}
5851
5852/// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction.
5853/// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target
5854/// has this feature and this is profitable.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005855bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005856 unsigned CombineCost = UINT_MAX;
5857 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI ||
5858 (!StressStoreExtract &&
5859 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(),
5860 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost)))
5861 return false;
5862
5863 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition.
5864 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until:
5865 // - We can combine the transition with its single use
5866 // => we got rid of the transition.
5867 // - We escape the current basic block
5868 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and
5869 // we do not do that for now.
5870 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent();
5871 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n');
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005872 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005873 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be
5874 // beneficial.
5875 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) {
5876 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
5877 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
5878
5879 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) {
5880 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block ("
5881 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName()
5882 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() << ").\n");
5883 return false;
5884 }
5885
5886 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) {
5887 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n'
5888 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
5889 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted);
5890 bool Changed = VPH.promote();
5891 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed;
5892 return Changed;
5893 }
5894
5895 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n");
5896 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted))
5897 return false;
5898
5899 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n");
5900
5901 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted);
5902 Inst = ToBePromoted;
5903 }
5904 return false;
5905}
5906
Wei Mia2f0b592016-12-22 19:44:45 +00005907/// For the instruction sequence of store below, F and I values
5908/// are bundled together as an i64 value before being stored into memory.
5909/// Sometimes it is more efficent to generate separate stores for F and I,
5910/// which can remove the bitwise instructions or sink them to colder places.
5911///
5912/// (store (or (zext (bitcast F to i32) to i64),
5913/// (shl (zext I to i64), 32)), addr) -->
5914/// (store F, addr) and (store I, addr+4)
5915///
5916/// Similarly, splitting for other merged store can also be beneficial, like:
5917/// For pair of {i32, i32}, i64 store --> two i32 stores.
5918/// For pair of {i32, i16}, i64 store --> two i32 stores.
5919/// For pair of {i16, i16}, i32 store --> two i16 stores.
5920/// For pair of {i16, i8}, i32 store --> two i16 stores.
5921/// For pair of {i8, i8}, i16 store --> two i8 stores.
5922///
5923/// We allow each target to determine specifically which kind of splitting is
5924/// supported.
5925///
5926/// The store patterns are commonly seen from the simple code snippet below
5927/// if only std::make_pair(...) is sroa transformed before inlined into hoo.
5928/// void goo(const std::pair<int, float> &);
5929/// hoo() {
5930/// ...
5931/// goo(std::make_pair(tmp, ftmp));
5932/// ...
5933/// }
5934///
5935/// Although we already have similar splitting in DAG Combine, we duplicate
5936/// it in CodeGenPrepare to catch the case in which pattern is across
5937/// multiple BBs. The logic in DAG Combine is kept to catch case generated
5938/// during code expansion.
5939static bool splitMergedValStore(StoreInst &SI, const DataLayout &DL,
5940 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
5941 // Handle simple but common cases only.
5942 Type *StoreType = SI.getValueOperand()->getType();
5943 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(StoreType) != DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) ||
5944 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) == 0)
5945 return false;
5946
5947 unsigned HalfValBitSize = DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) / 2;
5948 Type *SplitStoreType = Type::getIntNTy(SI.getContext(), HalfValBitSize);
5949 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(SplitStoreType) !=
5950 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(SplitStoreType))
5951 return false;
5952
5953 // Match the following patterns:
5954 // (store (or (zext LValue to i64),
5955 // (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize)
5956 // or
5957 // (store (or (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize)
5958 // (zext LValue to i64),
5959 // Expect both operands of OR and the first operand of SHL have only
5960 // one use.
5961 Value *LValue, *HValue;
5962 if (!match(SI.getValueOperand(),
5963 m_c_Or(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(LValue))),
5964 m_OneUse(m_Shl(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(HValue))),
5965 m_SpecificInt(HalfValBitSize))))))
5966 return false;
5967
5968 // Check LValue and HValue are int with size less or equal than 32.
5969 if (!LValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
5970 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(LValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize ||
5971 !HValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
5972 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(HValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize)
5973 return false;
5974
5975 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast instruction, use the EVT before bitcast
5976 // as the input of target query.
5977 auto *LBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(LValue);
5978 auto *HBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(HValue);
5979 EVT LowTy = LBC ? EVT::getEVT(LBC->getOperand(0)->getType())
5980 : EVT::getEVT(LValue->getType());
5981 EVT HighTy = HBC ? EVT::getEVT(HBC->getOperand(0)->getType())
5982 : EVT::getEVT(HValue->getType());
5983 if (!ForceSplitStore && !TLI.isMultiStoresCheaperThanBitsMerge(LowTy, HighTy))
5984 return false;
5985
5986 // Start to split store.
5987 IRBuilder<> Builder(SI.getContext());
5988 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&SI);
5989
5990 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast in another BB, create a new one in current
5991 // BB so it may be merged with the splitted stores by dag combiner.
5992 if (LBC && LBC->getParent() != SI.getParent())
5993 LValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(LBC->getOperand(0), LBC->getType());
5994 if (HBC && HBC->getParent() != SI.getParent())
5995 HValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(HBC->getOperand(0), HBC->getType());
5996
5997 auto CreateSplitStore = [&](Value *V, bool Upper) {
5998 V = Builder.CreateZExtOrBitCast(V, SplitStoreType);
5999 Value *Addr = Builder.CreateBitCast(
6000 SI.getOperand(1),
6001 SplitStoreType->getPointerTo(SI.getPointerAddressSpace()));
6002 if (Upper)
6003 Addr = Builder.CreateGEP(
6004 SplitStoreType, Addr,
6005 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(SI.getContext()), 1));
6006 Builder.CreateAlignedStore(
6007 V, Addr, Upper ? SI.getAlignment() / 2 : SI.getAlignment());
6008 };
6009
6010 CreateSplitStore(LValue, false);
6011 CreateSplitStore(HValue, true);
6012
6013 // Delete the old store.
6014 SI.eraseFromParent();
6015 return true;
6016}
6017
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006018bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00006019 // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from
6020 // stepping on each other's toes.
6021 if (InsertedInsts.count(I))
6022 return false;
6023
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006024 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
6025 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG)
6026 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a
6027 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00006028 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, {*DL, TLInfo})) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006029 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
6030 P->eraseFromParent();
6031 ++NumPHIsElim;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006032 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006033 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006034 return false;
6035 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006036
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006037 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006038 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have
6039 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold
6040 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant
6041 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist
6042 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't
6043 // want to forward-subst the cast.
6044 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0)))
6045 return false;
6046
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00006047 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL))
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006048 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006049
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006050 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00006051 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't
6052 /// fit in one register
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00006053 if (TLI &&
6054 TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(),
6055 TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) ==
6056 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00006057 return SinkCast(CI);
6058 } else {
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00006059 bool MadeChange = optimizeExt(I);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006060 return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I);
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00006061 }
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006062 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006063 return false;
6064 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006065
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006066 if (CmpInst *CI = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
Hal Finkeldecb0242014-01-02 21:13:43 +00006067 if (!TLI || !TLI->hasMultipleConditionRegisters())
Peter Zotovf87e5502016-04-03 17:11:53 +00006068 return OptimizeCmpExpression(CI, TLI);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006069
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006070 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) {
Sanjoy Das00757272016-12-16 20:29:39 +00006071 LI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006072 if (TLI) {
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00006073 bool Modified = optimizeLoadExt(LI);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006074 unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace();
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00006075 Modified |= optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS);
6076 return Modified;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006077 }
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00006078 return false;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006079 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006080
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006081 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) {
Wei Mia2f0b592016-12-22 19:44:45 +00006082 if (TLI && splitMergedValStore(*SI, *DL, *TLI))
6083 return true;
Sanjoy Das00757272016-12-16 20:29:39 +00006084 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006085 if (TLI) {
6086 unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace();
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006087 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1),
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006088 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS);
6089 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006090 return false;
6091 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006092
Matt Arsenault02d915b2017-03-15 22:35:20 +00006093 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) {
6094 unsigned AS = RMW->getPointerAddressSpace();
6095 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, RMW->getPointerOperand(),
6096 RMW->getType(), AS);
6097 }
6098
6099 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) {
6100 unsigned AS = CmpX->getPointerAddressSpace();
6101 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, CmpX->getPointerOperand(),
6102 CmpX->getCompareOperand()->getType(), AS);
6103 }
6104
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00006105 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I);
6106
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00006107 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) &&
6108 EnableAndCmpSinking && TLI)
6109 return sinkAndCmp0Expression(BinOp, *TLI, InsertedInsts);
6110
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00006111 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr ||
6112 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) {
6113 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1));
6114 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn())
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00006115 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00006116
6117 return false;
6118 }
6119
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006120 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00006121 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) {
6122 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast
6123 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(),
6124 GEPI->getName(), GEPI);
6125 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC);
6126 GEPI->eraseFromParent();
6127 ++NumGEPsElim;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006128 optimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT);
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006129 return true;
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00006130 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006131 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006132 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006133
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006134 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006135 return optimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT);
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006136
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00006137 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006138 return optimizeSelectInst(SI);
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00006139
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00006140 if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006141 return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00006142
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +00006143 if (auto *Switch = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(I))
6144 return optimizeSwitchInst(Switch);
6145
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00006146 if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006147 return optimizeExtractElementInst(I);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00006148
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006149 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006150}
6151
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006152/// Given an OR instruction, check to see if this is a bitreverse
6153/// idiom. If so, insert the new intrinsic and return true.
6154static bool makeBitReverse(Instruction &I, const DataLayout &DL,
6155 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
6156 if (!I.getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6157 !TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(ISD::BITREVERSE,
6158 TLI.getValueType(DL, I.getType(), true)))
6159 return false;
6160
6161 SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> Insts;
Chad Rosiera00df492016-05-25 16:22:14 +00006162 if (!recognizeBSwapOrBitReverseIdiom(&I, false, true, Insts))
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006163 return false;
6164 Instruction *LastInst = Insts.back();
6165 I.replaceAllUsesWith(LastInst);
6166 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(&I);
6167 return true;
6168}
6169
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00006170// In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used
6171// across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time
6172// selection.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006173bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +00006174 SunkAddrs.clear();
Cameron Zwarich5dd2aa22011-03-02 03:31:46 +00006175 bool MadeChange = false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00006176
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00006177 CurInstIterator = BB.begin();
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00006178 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00006179 MadeChange |= optimizeInst(&*CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00006180 if (ModifiedDT)
6181 return true;
6182 }
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00006183
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006184 bool MadeBitReverse = true;
6185 while (TLI && MadeBitReverse) {
6186 MadeBitReverse = false;
6187 for (auto &I : reverse(BB)) {
6188 if (makeBitReverse(I, *DL, *TLI)) {
6189 MadeBitReverse = MadeChange = true;
George Burgess IVd4febd12016-03-22 21:25:08 +00006190 ModifiedDT = true;
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006191 break;
6192 }
6193 }
6194 }
James Molloy3ef84c42016-01-15 10:36:01 +00006195 MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB);
Junmo Park7d6c5f12016-01-28 09:42:39 +00006196
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00006197 return MadeChange;
6198}
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006199
6200// llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006201// handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006202// find a node corresponding to the value.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006203bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006204 bool MadeChange = false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00006205 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00006206 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00006207 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00006208 Instruction *Insn = &*BI++;
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006209 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn);
Adrian Prantl32da8892014-04-25 20:49:25 +00006210 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These
6211 // instrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca)
6212 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca
6213 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to
6214 // where said address is used.
6215 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006216 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn;
6217 continue;
6218 }
6219
6220 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue());
6221 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) {
Reid Kleckner8de1fe22015-12-08 23:00:03 +00006222 // If VI is a phi in a block with an EHPad terminator, we can't insert
6223 // after it.
6224 if (isa<PHINode>(VI) && VI->getParent()->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
6225 continue;
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006226 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" << *DVI << ' ' << *VI);
6227 DVI->removeFromParent();
Reid Klecknere18f92b2015-12-08 22:33:23 +00006228 if (isa<PHINode>(VI))
6229 DVI->insertBefore(&*VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt());
6230 else
6231 DVI->insertAfter(VI);
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006232 MadeChange = true;
6233 ++NumDbgValueMoved;
6234 }
6235 }
6236 }
6237 return MadeChange;
6238}
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +00006239
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006240/// \brief Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t.
6241static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) {
6242 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse;
6243 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / UINT32_MAX) + 1;
6244 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale;
6245 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale;
6246}
6247
6248/// \brief Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like:
6249/// \code
6250/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
6251/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
6252/// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1
6253/// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
6254/// \endcode
6255/// into multiple branch instructions like:
6256/// \code
6257/// bb1:
6258/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
6259/// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2
6260/// bb2:
6261/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
6262/// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
6263/// \endcode
6264/// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations
6265/// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is
6266/// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions.
6267///
6268/// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG.
6269///
6270bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) {
David Blaikiedc3f01e2015-03-09 01:57:13 +00006271 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive())
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006272 return false;
6273
6274 bool MadeChange = false;
6275 for (auto &BB : F) {
6276 // Does this BB end with the following?
6277 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
6278 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
6279 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2
6280 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2"
6281 BinaryOperator *LogicOp;
6282 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB;
6283 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB)))
6284 continue;
6285
Sanjay Patel42574202015-09-02 19:23:23 +00006286 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator());
6287 if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
6288 continue;
6289
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006290 unsigned Opc;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006291 Value *Cond1, *Cond2;
6292 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
6293 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006294 Opc = Instruction::And;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006295 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
6296 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006297 Opc = Instruction::Or;
6298 else
6299 continue;
6300
6301 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ||
6302 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) )
6303 continue;
6304
6305 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump());
6306
6307 // Create a new BB.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smitha848c472016-02-21 19:52:15 +00006308 auto TmpBB =
6309 BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(), BB.getName() + ".cond.split",
6310 BB.getParent(), BB.getNextNode());
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006311
6312 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the
6313 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006314 Br1->setCondition(Cond1);
6315 LogicOp->eraseFromParent();
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006316
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006317 // Depending on the conditon we have to either replace the true or the false
6318 // successor of the original branch instruction.
6319 if (Opc == Instruction::And)
6320 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB);
6321 else
6322 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB);
6323
6324 // Fill in the new basic block.
6325 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB);
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006326 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) {
6327 I->removeFromParent();
6328 I->insertBefore(Br2);
6329 }
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006330
6331 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be
6332 // replaced in one succesor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from
6333 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one
6334 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target
6335 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition
6336 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that
Simon Pilgrimf2fbf432016-11-20 13:47:59 +00006337 // we perform the correct update for the PHI nodes.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006338 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch
6339 // instruction (or any other instruction).
6340 if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
6341 std::swap(TBB, FBB);
6342
6343 // Replace the old BB with the new BB.
6344 for (auto &I : *TBB) {
6345 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
6346 if (!PN)
6347 break;
6348 int i;
6349 while ((i = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0)
6350 PN->setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB);
6351 }
6352
6353 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB.
6354 for (auto &I : *FBB) {
6355 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
6356 if (!PN)
6357 break;
6358 auto *Val = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB);
6359 PN->addIncoming(Val, TmpBB);
6360 }
6361
6362 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder::
6363 // FindMergedConditions).
6364 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) {
6365 // Codegen X | Y as:
6366 // BB1:
6367 // jmp_if_X TBB
6368 // jmp TmpBB
6369 // TmpBB:
6370 // jmp_if_Y TBB
6371 // jmp FBB
6372 //
6373
6374 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB.
6375 // The requirement is that
6376 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB)
6377 // = TrueProb for orignal BB.
6378 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
6379 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice
6380 // assumes that
6381 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB.
6382 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for
6383 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated.
6384 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Sanjay Pateldc88bd62016-04-23 20:01:22 +00006385 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006386 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
6387 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight;
6388 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6389 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
6390 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6391
6392 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
6393 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight;
6394 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6395 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
6396 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6397 }
6398 } else {
6399 // Codegen X & Y as:
6400 // BB1:
6401 // jmp_if_X TmpBB
6402 // jmp FBB
6403 // TmpBB:
6404 // jmp_if_Y TBB
6405 // jmp FBB
6406 //
6407 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB.
6408
6409 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB.
6410 // The requirement is that
6411 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB)
6412 // = FalseProb for orignal BB.
6413 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
6414 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice
6415 // assumes that
6416 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB.
6417 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Sanjay Pateldc88bd62016-04-23 20:01:22 +00006418 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006419 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
6420 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
6421 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6422 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
6423 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6424
6425 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight;
6426 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
6427 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6428 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
6429 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6430 }
6431 }
6432
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006433 // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00006434 // available to CodeGenPrepare.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006435 ModifiedDT = true;
6436
6437 MadeChange = true;
6438
6439 DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump();
6440 TmpBB->dump());
6441 }
6442 return MadeChange;
6443}